Compass 5000.1.12 157605H

COMPASS™ Software
Release 5000.1.12
Training Manual
© 2014 Halliburton
Part Number 157605 Revision H March 2014

© 2014 Halliburton
All Rights Reserved
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also protected by
Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or
disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Halliburton | Landmark Software & Services

2107 CityWest Blvd, Building 2, Houston, Texas 77042-3051, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone:713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2015
Internet: www.halliburton.com/landmark
Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3D Surveillance, 3DFS, 3DView, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, Adaptive
Mesh Refining, ADC, Advanced Data Transfer, Analysis Model Layering, ARIES, ARIES DecisionSuite, Asset Data Mining, Asset
Decision Solutions, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Asset Journal, Asset Performance, AssetConnect,
AssetConnect Enterprise, AssetConnect Enterprise Express, AssetConnect Expert, AssetDirector, AssetJournal, AssetLink, AssetLink
Advisor, AssetLink Director, AssetLink Observer, AssetObserver, AssetObserver Advisor, AssetOptimizer, AssetPlanner, AssetPredictor,
AssetSolver, AssetSolver Online, AssetView, AssetView 2D, AssetView 3D, Barrier Assurance Monitoring, BLITZPAK, CartoSnap,
CasingLife, CasingSeat, CDS Connect, CGMage Builder, Channel Trim, COMPASS, Contract Generation, Corporate Data Archiver,
Corporate Data Store, Data Analyzer, DataManager, DataServer, DataStar, DataVera, DBPlot, Decision Management System,
DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace 3D Drill View, DecisionSpace 3D Drill View KM, DecisionSpace AssetLink, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner,
DecisionSpace AssetSolver, DecisionSpace Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace Base Module, DecisionSpace Data Quality, DecisionSpace
Desktop, DecisionSpace Geosciences, DecisionSpace GIS Module, DecisionSpace GRC Module, DecisionSpace Nexus, DecisionSpace
Reservoir, DecisionSuite, Deeper Knowledge. Broader Understanding., Depth Team, Depth Team Explorer, Depth Team Express, Depth
Team Extreme, Depth Team Interpreter, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam
Interpreter, Desktop Navigator, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DIMS, Discovery, Discovery 3D, Discovery Asset, Discovery
Framebuilder, Discovery PowerStation, Discovery Suite, DMS, Drillability Suite, Drilling Desktop, DrillModel, DrillNET, Drill-to-the-
Earth-Model, Drillworks, Drillworks ConnectML, Drillworks Predict, DSS, Dynamic Frameworks to Fill, Dynamic Reservoir
Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EDM, EDM AutoSync, EDT, eLandmark, Engineer’s Data Model, Engineer’s Desktop,
Engineer’s Link, ENGINEERING NOTES, eNotes, ESP, Event Similarity Prediction, ezFault, ezModel, ezSurface, ezTracker,
ezTracker2D, ezValidator, FastTrack, Field Scenario Planner, FieldPlan, For Production, FrameBuilder, Frameworks to Fill, FZAP!,
GeoAtlas, GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix Exploration System, Geologic Interpretation Component, Geometric Kernel,
GeoProbe, GeoProbe GF DataServer, GeoSmith, GES, GES97, GesFull, GESXplorer, GMAplus, GMI Imager, Grid3D, GRIDGENR, H.
Clean, Handheld Field Operator, HHFO, High Science Simplified, Horizon Generation, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, iEnergy, Infrastructure,
iNotes, Iso Core, IsoMap, iWellFile, KnowledgeSource, Landmark (as a service), Landmark (as software), Landmark Decision Center,
LandNetX, Landscape, Large Model, Lattix, LeaseMap, Limits, LithoTect, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, MagicDesk, Make Great Decisions,
MathPack, MDS Connect, MicroTopology, MIMIC, MIMIC+, Model Builder, NETool, Nexus (as a service), Nexus (as software), Nexus
View, Object MP, OneCall, OpenBooks, OpenJournal, OpenLink, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWire Client,
OpenWire Server, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Development Kit, OpenWorks Production, OpenWorks Well File, Operations Management
Suite, PAL, Parallel-VIP, Parametric Modeling, Petris WINDS Enterprise, PetrisWINDS, PetroBank, PetroBank Explorer, PetroBank
Master Data Store, PetroWorks, PetroWorks Asset, PetroWorks Pro, PetroWorks ULTRA, PLOT EXPRESS, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PostStack Family, Power Interpretation, PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerExplorer
Connect, PowerGrid, PowerHub, PowerModel, PowerView, PrecisionTarget, Presgraf, PressWorks, PRIZM, Production, Production Asset
Manager, PROFILE, Project Administrator, ProMAGIC Connect, ProMAGIC Server, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMax 3D, ProMAX
3DPSDM, ProMAX 4D, ProMAX Family, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, Query Builder, Quick, Quick+, QUICKDIF, Quickwell,
Quickwell+, Quiklog, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, RAYMAP+, Real Freedom, Real Time Asset Management
Center, Real Time Decision Center, Real Time Operations Center, Real Time Production Surveillance, Real Time Surveillance, Real-time
View, Recall, Reference Data Manager, Reservoir, Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, Resolve, RTOC, SCAN, SeisCube,
SEISINFO, SeisMap, SeisMapX, Seismic Data Check, SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks 2D, SeisWorks
3D, SeisWorks PowerCalculator, SeisWorks PowerJournal, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisWorks PowerView, SeisXchange, Semblance
Computation and Analysis, Sierra Family, SigmaView, SimConnect, SimConvert, SimDataStudio, SimResults, SimResults+,
SimResults+3D, SIVA+, SLAM, Smart Change, Smart Deploy, Smart Flow, Smart Skills, Smart Start, Smart Sustain, Smart Transform,
Smart Vision, SmartFlow, smartSECTION, smartSTRAT, Spatializer, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StratAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StratWorks 3D, StreamCalc, StressCheck, STRUCT, Structure Cube, Surf & Connect, SurfNet, SynTool, System Start for
Servers, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients, SystemStart for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, Tanks & Tubes, TDQ, Team Workspace,
TERAS, T-Grid, The Engineer’s DeskTop, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs Revenue Interface, TracPlanner, TracPlanner
Xpress, Trend Form Gridding, Trimmed Grid, Tubular Basic, Turbo Synthetics, Unconventional Essentials, VESPA, VESPA+, VIP, VIP-
COMP, VIP-CORE, VIPDataStudio, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-THERM, vSpace,
vSpace Blueprint, vSpace Onsite, WavX, Web Editor, Well H. Clean, Well Seismic Fusion, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, Wellbore Planner
Connect, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN, WellSolver, WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, You’re in Control. Experience the difference., ZAP!,
ZEH, ZEH Plot, ZetaAnalytics, Z-MAP, Z-MAP Plus, and ZPS are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of Halliburton.
All other trademarks, service marks, and product or service names are the trademarks or names of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by
Halliburton. Halliburton assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not
allow disclaimer of expressed or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Third Party Licenses and Attributions
Halliburton acknowledges that certain third party code has been bundled with, or embedded in, its software. The licensors of this
third party code, and the terms and conditions of their respective licenses, may be found at the following location:
PathNameInInstallationDir/Third_Party.pdf
Disclaimer
The programs and documentation may provide links to external web sites and access to content, products, and services from third
parties. Halliburton is not responsible for the availability of, or any content provided on, third party web sites. You bear all risks
associated with the use of such content. If you choose to purchase any products or services from a third party, the relationship is
directly between you and the third party. Halliburton is not responsible for: (a) the quality of third party products or services; or (b)
fulfilling any of the terms of the agreement with the third party, including delivery of products or services and warranty obligations
related to purchased products or services. Halliburton is not responsible for any loss or damage of any sort that you may incur from
dealing with any third party.
COMPASS™ Software
Release 5000.1.12
Training Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What is the COMPASS™ Software? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Anticollision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Who Should Use the COMPASS™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Licensing and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Survey Only License Allowing Anti-Collision Feature Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Chapter 2: The Engineer’s Data Model 

(EDM™) Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Logging In to the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Starting the COMPASS™ Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Describing the Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Associated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Associated with Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Wellpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Pore Pressure Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fracture Gradient Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Geothermal Gradient Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Associated with Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Hole Section Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Copying and Pasting Associated Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual i

Contents
Rules for Associating Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Common Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Data Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

How Locking Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Locking Company Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Locking Levels Below Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Concurrent Use of Same Data By Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

How the Well Explorer Handles Concurrent Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Same User on Same Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Multiple Users, Different Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Reload Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Importing and Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Importing Data into the EDM™ Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Importing EDM™ Well Data from Another Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Importing a DEX™ Software File into the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Exporting Data from the EDM™ Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Exporting Data in XML Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Exporting Well Data in DEX™ Software Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Wellbore Planner™ Software Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Wellbore Planner™ Software Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Wellbore Planner™ Software Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
DIMS™ Software for Windows® Survey Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Well. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Sidetrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Tool Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Using Datums in EDM™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Definition of Terms Associated With Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
System Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Well Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Depth Reference Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Offshore Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Subsea Check Box (Offshore Well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
ii COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Ground Elevation (Land Well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Water Depth (Offshore Well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Mudline Depth (Only For Offshore Subsea Well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Wellhead Depth (Subsea Well). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Wellhead Elevation (Platform and Land Wells). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Air Gap (Calculated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Design Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Depth Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Setting Up Datums for Your Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Chapter 3: Using the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Introducing the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Well Explorer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
The Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Associated Data Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Data Components Associated with a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
The Recent Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
The Filter Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Displaying/Sizing the Well Explorer and Recent Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Positioning the Well Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Tracking Data Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Drag-and-drop Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Well Explorer Right-click Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Working at the Database Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
New Company (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
New Folder (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Instant Plan (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Instant Survey (Database Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Import (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Well Name (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Wellbore Name (Database Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Virtual Folders (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Lithologies (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Backup/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual iii

Contents
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Find (Database Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Refresh (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Expand All (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Collapse All (Database Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Working at the Company Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Open (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
New Project (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
New Attachment (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
New Folder (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Paste (Company Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Rename (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Delete (Company Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Export (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Survey Tools (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Survey Tool Error Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Cone of Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Systematic Error Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
ISCWSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
To create a new tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
To edit an existing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
To delete a survey tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
To export a survey tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
To import a survey tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Properties (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Using the Company Properties > General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Using the Company Properties > Anticollision Tab(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Using the Company Properties > Anticollision Alerts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Using the Company Properties > Partners Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Using the Company Properties > Calc Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Using the Company Properties > Wellbore Types Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Expand All (Company Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Collapse All (Company Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Working at the Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Open (Project Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
New Site (Project Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
New Attachment (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
New Folder (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Copy (Project Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Paste (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
iv COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Rename (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Delete (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Export (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Targets (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Poly Lines (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Surfaces (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Using the Surface Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Multi-Design Export (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Properties (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Using the Project Properties > General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Using the Project Properties > Map Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Expand All (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Collapse All (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Working at the Site Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Open (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
New Well (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
New Attachment (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
New Folder (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Copy (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Paste (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Rename (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Delete (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Export (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Unlock All (Site Level)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Templates (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Template Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Rectangular Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Circular Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Poly Lines (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Multi-Design Export (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Properties (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Using the Site Properties > General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Using the Site Properties > Location Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Expand All (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Collapse All (Site Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Working at the Well Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Open (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
New Wellbore (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
New Attachment (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
New Folder (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual v

Contents
Copy (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

Paste (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Rename (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Delete (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Export (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Multi-Design Export (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
WITSML (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Poly Lines (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Properties (Well Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Using the Well Properties > General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Using the Well Properties > Depth Reference Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Using the Well Properties > Well Ref Pt Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Using the Well Properties > Location Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Expand All (Well Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Collapse All (Well Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Working at the Wellbore Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Open (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
New Plan (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
New Actual Design (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
New Survey (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
New Attachment (Wellbore Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
New Folder (Wellbore Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Copy (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Paste (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Rename (Wellbore Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Delete (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Export (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Import DIMS Surveys (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
WITSML (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Targets (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Properties (Wellbore Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Working at the Design Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Open (Design Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
View/Edit (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
New Survey (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Copy (Design Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Paste (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Rename (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Delete (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Export (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
vi COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Import (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Casing (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Formations (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Reports (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Chapter 4: Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Accessing Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Using the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Using the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Viewing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Locked Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Concurrency Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Interpreting the SAM Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Data Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Recent Bar or Recent Selections List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Filter Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Using the Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Using Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Using Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Accessing the Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Configuring Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Chapter 5: Planning Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Defining Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Using Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual vii

Contents
Target Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Accessing the Target Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Using the Target Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Defining the Target Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Circular Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Elliptical Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rectangular Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Polygonal Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Defining Drilling Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Select Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Confidence Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Create Drilling Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Delete Drilling Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
View Points in NotePad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using the Target Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Target Landing Point Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
To change the landing point for planning calculation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Creating a Plan Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Naming the Plan Design and Defining the Depth Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Specifying the Tie-on Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Defining the Survey Tool Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Specifying the Vertical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Using the Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Accessing the Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Using the Plan Editor Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Adding a Plan Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Deleting a Plan Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Incremental Measured Depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Planning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

2D Directional Well Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Slant Well Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
To Design a Slant Well: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
S-well Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
To Enter a 2D S-well Profile: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
3D Well Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Build/Turn Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Dogleg/Toolface Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Build/Turn vs. Dogleg/Toolface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
viii COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Optimum Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

To Build an Optimum Align Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Hold Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Thread Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
To Thread Targets: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Project Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Applied Walk Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Using the Plan Optimiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Torque and Drag Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Plan Optimiser Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Plan Editor Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Data Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Using the Optimiser Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Profile Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Drill String Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Open Hole Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Cased Hole Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Drilling Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Cost Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Limits Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Offset Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Buttons and Other Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Calculate or Optimise? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Tubular Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Plan Optimiser Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
The Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Measured Depth Against Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Measured Depth Against Tension/Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Vertical Depth Against Vertical Section with Side Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Bubble View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Planning and Anticollision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Planning Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Planning Report Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual ix

Contents
Chapter 6: AntiCollision Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Specifying Anticollision Analysis Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Error Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
ISCWSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Cone of Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Scan Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
3D Closest Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Traveling Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Trav Cylinder North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Horizontal Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Comparing the Scan Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Traveling Cylinder Scan and Near-perpendicular Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Warning Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Error Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Depth Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Rules Based. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Error Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Elliptical Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Circular Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Combined Covariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Projected Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Ellipsoid Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Including Casings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Selecting Offset Designs for Anticollision Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Anticollision Offset Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Specifying Anticollision Interpolation Intervals and Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Analyzing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Using Live Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Spider View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Viewing Casing Tunnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Ladder View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
To Set Up a Ladder Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Optionally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Equivalent Magnetic Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Separation Factor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
x COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Traveling Cylinder View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

To Set Up a Traveling Cylinder Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Optionally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Well in a Tunnel View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Radioactive Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Pedal Curve Error Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Interactive Traveling Cylinder View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
3D Proximity View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
To Set Up a 3D Proximity Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Interactive Scroll Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Ellipse Separation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
To Set Up a Data Scan Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Definition of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Page Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Report Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Error Ellipse Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
To Set Up an Ellipse Survey Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Definition of Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Survey Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Chapter 7: Survey Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Defining New Survey Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Naming and Specifying General Information About the Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Managing Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Using the Survey Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Using the Survey Editor Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Interpolating Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Project Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Projecting To Target, Plan, or Formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Using the User-defined Projection, Curve Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Survey Data Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual xi

Contents
Input Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Importing Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Survey Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Normal Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Inertial Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Inertial Survey - Calculate MD/Inc/Azi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Inclination Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
SAG Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Sliding Sheet and SAG Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Analyzing Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Using Varying Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Using the 2D Varying Curvature Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
3D Varying Curvature Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Using Graphs to Analyze Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Max/Min View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Analysis Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Plotting Multiple Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Relative Instrument Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Survey Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Survey Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Export File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Exporting to a User-defined Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Exporting to a Predefined Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Chapter 8: Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Comparing Live Graphs and Wall Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Live Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Wall Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Using Live Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Accessing Live Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Live Graphs Common to All Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Live Graphs in the Survey Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Live Graphs in the Anticollision Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
xii COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Customizing Live Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Current Track Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Offset Track Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Multicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Color by Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Sizes (% of the Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Sizes (% of the Graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Why Is Size Based On % of Window or % of Graph? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Symbol Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Using the Live Graph Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Legend Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Using the 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Using the Vertical Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Using the Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Using the Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Accessing the Wall Plot Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Examining the Wall Plot Composer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
What is an Object? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
What is a Subobject?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Setting Up the Wall Plot Composer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Using the Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Working With Wall Plot Composer Objects and Subobjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Adding an Object to the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Adding an Art Object to the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Selecting Objects on the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Selecting Subobjects Within an Object on the Wall Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Moving Objects or Subobjects on the Wall Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Deleting Objects or Subobjects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Resizing Objects or Subobjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Placing Objects and Subobjects Relative to Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Aligning Objects and Subobjects on the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Editing Style, Thickness, and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Exporting Selected Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Designating an Object’s Properties as the Default Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Setting an Exact Graph Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Embedding Images on a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Using Wall Plot Composer Right-click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual xiii

Contents
Wall Plot Composer Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Chapter 9: Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Geodetic Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

The Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Grid Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Scale Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
UTM Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Geomagnetic Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

The Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
High Definition Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Using the Site Optimiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Site Optimiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Design Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Site Centre Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Optimiser Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Chapter 10: Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Introducing Directional Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Early Means of Directional Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Oriented Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Survey Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Modern Directional Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Mud Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Measurement Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
xiv COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Contents
Measurement While Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Emerging Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Coiled Tubing/Underbalanced Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Multilaterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Rotary Steerable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Geosteering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Survey Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Output Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Minimum Curvature (or Circular Arc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Calculate RF (Minimum Curvature Ratio Factor) Smoothing Factor . . . . . . 10-24
Radius of Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Average Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Balanced Tangential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Inclination-only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Geodesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Map Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
US Stateplane Coordinate System 1983 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Universal Transverse Mercator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
UK National Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Geomagnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Geomagnetic Main Field Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Factors that Influence Declination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
True, Grid, and Magnetic North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

True North. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Grid North. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Magnetic North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Driller’s Target Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Chapter 11: References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual xv

Contents
xvi COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Chapter 1
Introduction
What is the COMPASS™ Software?
The Computerized Planning and Analysis Survey System
(COMPASS™) software is a comprehensive software tool designed for
use in directional well design by either oil companies or directional
contractors. The COMPASS software for Windows® is a tool that
enables you to quickly and accurately plan wells and identify potential
problems at the earliest possible stage.
All of the features for complex well trajectory design, monitoring, and
analysis are included. The list of features includes survey and planning
methods, torque-drag optimization, anticollision plotting with traveling
cylinder, and ellipse of uncertainty.
The COMPASS software is designed to increase the efficiency and

cost-effectiveness of directional well planning and wellbore monitoring
by providing an easy-to-use interface and numerous other features. The
COMPASS software enables fast and accurate well planning and
identification of potential directional drilling problems at the earliest
possible stage.
The COMPASS software enables you to:
• design the shape of wellbores by using the Planning module.
• calculate the shape of wellbores by using the Survey module.
• calculate positional uncertainty and wellbore separation by using

the Anticollision module.
• create hard copy plots by using the Wallplot Composer module.
• display results by using various online graphics and hard

copy reports.
• construct a data repository for storing deviation data that can be

linked to other data models.
COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual 1-1

Chapter 1: Introduction
The following technical features ensure that the COMPASS software is

the most comprehensive software of its kind available today:
• based on the Landmark® EDM™ database to provide seamless

integration with other Landmark Drilling software products, such
as CasingSeat™, StressCheck™, WELLPLAN™, WELLCAT™,
OpenWells®, PROFILE™, and Well Cost™
• integration with the Landmark DecisionSpace® platform software

products, including TracPlanner™, PrecisionTarget™,
AssetPlanner™, and ScenarioPlanner
• ODBC-compliant databases
• logical, context-designed data model
• consistent, easy-to-use interface
• flexible units handling
• comprehensive, context-sensitive online help written by engineers
• comprehensive live graphical output
• multicomponent, customizable plots with Wallplot Composer
• formatted customizable reports with ASCII file options
• integrated planning and analysis workflow complemented by live

graphic updates
• support for multiple depth datums per site
• integration with industry-accepted geodetic, geomagnetic, and

survey tool error models
• customizable survey tool error models
• definition of targets with different geometry types
• Project Ahead and varying curvature survey analysis tools
• easy-to-use planning tool with numerous 2D and 3D

planning solutions
• improved horizontal well support with multiple target threading
1-2 COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

• curved Conductor/Slant rig support with configurable well

reference point
• multiple anticollision scan methods and graphical outputs
• detailed positional uncertainty error surface geometry calculation

and reporting
Modules
The COMPASS software consists of three main modules integrated by
supporting features and an underlying data structure.
Survey
The Survey module calculates a wellbore’s trajectory. The COMPASS
software considers a survey to be a set of observations made with a
single survey tool in the same tool run. Data can be entered in a
spreadsheet or imported and processed using industry-standard
calculation methods. The resulting survey files can be edited, printed, or
analyzed. Surveys may be spliced together to form a definitive best path
by using a tool interval editor. Special provisions are made for Inertial-
and Inclination-only surveys. The Survey module provides an advanced
“Project Ahead” from survey station to target, formation, or well plan.
Two methods enable you to assess survey data for incorrectly entered
survey data or bad readings from the survey tool. Input Validation
isolates bad survey data as soon as it is entered. Varying Curvature
isolates incorrect survey station data by highlighting its inconsistency.
Survey analysis graphs produce comparison plots of survey and plan
data for a number of different variables.
The COMPASS survey data can be referenced to any number of

user-defined datums and can include a number of canned or custom
formatted report layouts that you can send to an ASCII file. You can also
export survey data to a raw survey file, or output it to a number of
canned or custom export file formats.

After you enter data, you can do the following:
• perform point interpolations for any number of measured or true

vertical depths, inclinations, or azimuths
• use the Project Ahead tool to compare the wellpath’s current

trajectory against a proposed target or plan
• perform free projections to a proposed MD or TVD by using an

entered Build and Turn rate, dogleg, and toolface, or by
constructing a trend that uses a number of existing
survey observations.
Planning
Use the Plan Editor to design the shape of proposed wellbores. The
Planning environment has an interactive editing worksheet that allows
you to build up the well trajectory in sections. Many different plan
sections are available for each section, and they can be based on two- or
three-dimensional Slant or S-Shaped profiles, or three-dimensional
dogleg/toolface, or build/turn curves. Alternatively, the plan can be
imported or entered directly into the spreadsheet line-by-line. At each
stage of well planning, you can see the wellbore graphics dynamically
update as changes are made. You can revisit, insert, or delete any section
of a plan, and the whole plan will be recomputed.
The Wellbore Optimiser integrates torque drag analysis into the

planning module. It determines the best combination of trajectory
design parameters that lead to the minimum cost, anticollision, or torque
and drag solution. Planned designs that are undrillable because they will
cause colliding with other wellbores or exceed the drill strings tension,
torque, buckling, side force, or fatigue limits are indicated.
The following different plan methods are supported:
• Slant Well and S-Well designs are available to plan a well within a
vertical section.
• In 3D, you can construct plans that use Build and Turn curves for
rotary-drilled sections or Dogleg/Toolface curves for steering
tool-drilled sections.

• You can also use additional tools such as Optimum Align, which
enables steering to be minimized to certain user-selected parts of
the well; Thread Targets, which automatically constructs a plan
through two or more targets that use various plan types; and the
Landing Calculator, which enables a plan to intersect a target plane
along a given azimuth.
• For long hold sections, a plan can be corrected for anticipated Walk
rates through certain formations.
Anticollision
Anticollision can be used to check the separation of surveyed and
planned wellbores from offset wells. Anticollision provides spider plots,
ladder plots, traveling cylinder, and printouts of well proximity scans.
Any anticollision scans can be run interactively with planning,
surveying, or projecting ahead. All anticollision calculations are
integrated with wellbore uncertainties that are shown on graphs or
reported as separation ratios. Warnings may be configured to alert you
when the wellbores converge within a minimum ratio or distance that is
specified by company policy.
The following plots are available:
• Travelling Cylinder View – wellpath separation referenced from

either the high side of the well or the high side plus current
well azimuth
• Ladder View – MD versus wellpath separation
• Separation Factor View – MD versus separation factor
• 3D Proximity View – 3D presentation of all wells included in

the scan
• Spider Plot – Plan view of all wellpaths included in the scan
• Error Ellipse report – description of the geometry of the

uncertainty ellipsoid at all depths down the reference wellpath

Who Should Use the COMPASS™ Software

The COMPASS software is designed for engineers with different
responsibilities and for different types of organizations, such as oil
companies, directional/survey contractors, and engineering consultants.
Different users use the COMPASS software in different ways and work
with different modules according to their job requirements.
An engineer can use this software to track a well through the

following stages:
• the initial data-gathering stage, determining required geological

targets, surface drilling locations, and planning constraints
• the various phases of directional well design, including collision

avoidance, target analysis, operational stages of recording surveys,
checking for anticollision risks, doing look-aheads, and performing
survey quality assessments
• the compilation of a final definitive survey
Within an oil company, a Well Planner plans a well to intersect one or

more targets provided by their Geoscience department. Targets are
analyzed and sized in conjunction with the design of the survey
program. The plan can be 2D or 3D and may require the use of rotary or
steerable bottomhole assemblies for it to be drilled. The plan is
communicated to and agreed upon by all concerned parties.
While drilling, the Rigsite Company Representative uses the

COMPASS software to enter and collate survey data, report the wellpath
trajectory back to town, and perform quality control checks on the data
to ensure the survey contractor obtains and records data correctly.
In town, the Operations Engineer in the Drilling Office receives the

survey data, adds it to their COMPASS database, and shares it with
other parts of their organization or with partners.
Both engineers may perform anticollision scans down the active well to
assess the collision risk. Also, they may compare the actual wellpath
trajectory with the directional well plan to ensure that the well is on
track. If the well veers away from the plan, they can do Back-On-Track
calculations to steer the wellpath back to its planned trajectory.
When the well is completed, the final definitive survey is composed,

locked, and made available for use with anticollision scanning or
sidetrack planning on future wells.

A Directional Contractor may use the COMPASS software to plan a

well on behalf of an oil company. At the rigsite, contract Surveyors and
Directional Drillers use the COMPASS software to enter survey data as
it is received at the surface or read on the drill floor, and a comparison
is made with the planned trajectory. The data is checked for errors and
then reported to the oil company representative in the form of reports,
graphs, or wallplots.
The contractor can also provide the data electronically on a disk or send
it across a network. If their client also uses the COMPASS software,
they can send a transfer file to the Company Representative or
Drilling Office.
Directional Well Planners specialize in designing and assessing

wellpaths for a number of conditions. In addition to planning wells
through various targets and assessing the plan for a collision risk, they
use geologic targets provided by the Geoscience group to construct
drilling targets. This process is achieved using survey tool error models
applied down the planned wellpath to reduce the size of the target
surface. This modeling enables the planner to design a cost-effective
survey program that is applied to the given geological target sizes.
A Survey Focal Point is responsible for maintaining an accessible

quality-checked survey database for an oil company. They can also be
involved in analyzing positional uncertainty error models associated
with different types of survey tools. Based on the accuracy and
reliability of different tools, they can recommend the use of certain tools
to the Well Planning group.
Licensing and Installation

The following three types of installations are available for
EDM applications:
• Local (Standalone) Installation: This type of installation is

appropriate for engineers that need to install EDM locally on a
single computer to be used by one person. This installation copies
the product software, database, and all required support files to the
designated directory on the computer’s local hard drive. For more
information, see the EDM Common Installation guide.

• Server (Network Server) Installation: This installation should be

used when the EDM applications will be installed centrally on a
server to be shared by a number of users. This installation copies
the product software, database, and all required support files to the
designated shared directory on the network server. These files must
be accessible to the network client computers. For more
information, see the EDM Common Installation guide.
• Client (Network Client) Installation: This installation is used

when EDM applications will be run from the network. The client
installation copies only the required system files to the local
computer’s hard drive, then creates shortcuts to the shared
application executable files located in a designated directory on the
network server. For more information, see the EDM Common
Installation guide.
Licensing
Refer to the EDT™ Summary Level Release Notes.
Survey Only License Allowing Anti-Collision Feature Use

When using the field version of COMPASS™ with survey only license,
it is possible to access anti-collision features but without survey errors
(no ellipse separation, casings or separation factor). Although anti-
collision menu items, reports, and views will be visible, all survey error
dependent results, like Separation Factor, Ellipse separation will be
NULL or show “N/A” in results.
Users can choose the license type on start-up or in the User Settings
dialog. This is used in the context where a company has mixed network
licenses. The first users will normally take the most extensive
license,(Survey, Plan AC) and other users will get what remains. This
license preference will take the lower grade license on startup and leave

the higher grade licenses for other users. The use of this preference is
stored in the users local registry (HKCU) and the setting is voluntary.


Chapter 2
The Engineer’s Data Model
(EDM™) Database
Overview
Many of the Landmark® drilling applications use a common database

and data structure—the Engineer’s Data Model (EDM™) database—to
support the different levels of data that are required to use the
Landmark drilling and production software.
This database provides a significant advantage while using the software

because of improved integration between drilling software products.
Currently, the following software products use the common database
and data structure: COMPASS™, CasingSeat™, StressCheck™,
WELLPLAN™, WELLCAT™, OpenWells®, PROFILE™,
and Well Cost™.
Note
Start menu names may be different for various installs.
For example: Landmark Engineer’s Desktop™ software 5000.1.
In this chapter, you will be introduced to:
• logging in to the database
• data structure
• common data
• data locking
• importing and exporting data

Chapter 2: The Engineer’s Data Model (EDM™) Database
Logging In to the Database
Any Landmark drilling software that is using the Engineer’s Data Model
requires you to log in. This login dialog box is used to select the database
and to provide a user ID and password.
Starting the COMPASS™ Software

You can start the COMPASS software in two ways:
• Use the Start menu. Select the COMPASS software by selecting

Landmark EDM > COMPASS.
• Double-click any desktop shortcut you have configured.

Describing the Data Structure
The EDM database has a hierarchical data structure to support the

different levels of data that are required by different drilling suite
applications. EDM uses the following hierarchical levels:
Database
Company
Hierarchical database structure of the
Project EDM database.
Site
Well
Wellbore
Design
Case
EDM™ Hierarchical Data Structure

Hierarchical Description
Level
Database Database is the highest level in the Well Explorer hierarchy. You
can only work in one database at a time. For more information,
see “Working at the Database Level” on page 3-7.
Company Company is the second-highest data level in the hierarchy. You

can define several companies within the database you are using.
Each company must have a unique name. If you work for an
operator, you most likely have only one company. If you work for
a service company, you may have several companies. For more
information, see “Working at the Company Level” on page 3-14.
Project Project is the data level directly beneath company. Each project
within a company must have a unique name. A project can be
thought of as a field or as a group of sites. A project has one
system datum (mean sea level, lowest astronomical tide, and so
on) that is used to define 0 TVD for the project. Within the
project, wellbores can be referenced to the project level system
datum or to additional datums specified at the well level. For
more information, see “Using Datums in EDM™” on page 2-21
or “Working at the Project Level” on page 3-35.

EDM™ Hierarchical Data Structure

Hierarchical Description
Level
Site Site is the data level directly beneath the Project level. Each site
within a project must have a unique name. A site is a collection of
one or more wells that are all referenced from a local coordinated
system centered on the site location. A site can be a single land
well, an offshore subsea well, a group of wells drilled from an
onshore pad, or a group of wells drilled from an offshore
platform. For more information, see “Working at the Site Level”
on page 3-45.
Well Well is the data level directly beneath the Site level. Each well
within a site must have a unique name. A well is simply a surface
location. A well can have more than one wellbore associated with
it. For example, the original wellbore may have one or more
sidetracks tied on to it at different kick-off depths. For more
information, see “Working at the Well Level” on page 3-57.
Wellbore Wellbore is the data level directly beneath the Well level. Each
wellbore within a well must have a unique name. A wellbore is a
compilation of one or more sections originating at the surface and
continuing to a depth. A wellbore can be the original well drilled
from the surface or a sidetrack drilled from a parent wellbore. If a
well has an original hole and two sidetracks, the well has three
wellbores. For more information, see “Working at the Wellbore
Level” on page 3-65.
Design Design is the data level directly beneath the Wellbore level.
Each design within a wellbore must have a unique name. A
design can be thought of as a design phase. Associated with
each design are a pore pressure group, a fracture pressure group,
a temperature gradient, and a survey. A design may have several
cases associated with it, but each case will use the same pore
pressure group, fracture pressure group, temperature gradient,
and survey. A design can be categorized as prototype, planned,
or actual. You may have several different versions of prototype
designs. For example, assume the geologist wants to analyze
two different formation fracture gradients. This could easily be
accomplished by having two prototype designs that are identical
except for the fracture gradient group. The StressCheck and
COMPASS applications routinely use designs. For more
information, see “Working at the Design Level” on page 3-67.

Associated Components
This section discusses several additional data components that are
associated with designs or cases.
Associated with Designs
Wellpaths
A wellpath is a series of survey tool readings that have been observed in
the same wellbore and increase with measured depth. All cases within
the same design use the same wellpath.
Pore Pressure Groups

A Pore Pressure group is a set of pore pressures that define the pore
pressure regime over a depth range from surface to some vertical depth.
All cases within the same design use the same pore pressure.
Fracture Gradient Groups

A Fracture Gradient group is a set of fracture pressures that define the
fracture gradient regime over a depth range from surface to some
vertical depth. All cases within the same design use the same
fracture gradient.
Geothermal Gradient Groups

A Geothermal Gradient group is a set of undisturbed earth temperatures
that define the temperatures over a depth range from the surface to some
vertical depth. All cases within the same design use the same
geothermal gradient.
Associated with Cases
Hole Section Groups

A Hole Section group defines the wellbore as the workstring would see
it. For example, a hole section may contain a riser, a casing section, and
an open hole section. A hole section can also have a tubing section or a
drill pipe section depending on the situation. Multiple cases may use the
same hole section.

Assemblies
An Assembly defines the workstring. There are several types of
workstrings, including coiled tubing, casing, drillstrings, liners, and
tubing strings. Multiple cases may use the same assembly.
Fluids
A Fluid defines a drilling, cementing, or spacer fluid. A Fluid is linked
to a case and a case can have more than one fluid linked to it. One fluid
can be linked to multiple cases.
Copying and Pasting Associated Items

All of these associated items, with the exception of fluids, are
automatically created and associated (linked) by Well Explorer to the
design or case.
All of these items are visible in Well Explorer so that you can copy and
paste them by using the right-click menu. For example, when you copy
a wellpath and paste it into a different design, the wellpath that currently
exists for the target design is deleted. Well Explorer replaces the old
wellpath with the copy of the new one.
Rules for Associating Components

The rules for associating components are listed below.
For Definitive Surveys, Pore Pressure Groups, Fracture Gradient

Groups, Geothermal Gradient Groups, Assemblies, and Hole Sections:
• Each component can only be associated with one design or case.
• When one component is copied and pasted, an actual copy is made.
• When one component is pasted, the component it replaces will be

deleted (unless it is locked).
• If the destination for the paste is locked (Design or Case) or the

item to be replaced is locked, a message appears and the paste is
not completed.
• If the design is locked, all of its associated items are also locked.

For Fluids:
• When a fluid is copied and pasted, an actual copy is made.
• When a fluid is pasted, the one it replaces will not be deleted.
• Fluids can only be deleted by using the Fluid Editor in the

WELLPLAN software.
• If the destination case is locked or the fluid to be replaced is locked,

a message appears and the paste is not completed.

Common Data
Common data stored in the EDM database and available for use by all
Engineer’s Desktop™ (EDT™) applications in database mode include:
• unit system
• pipe catalog
• connections catalog
• pore pressure
• fracture gradient
• temperature gradient
• surveys
• all fields in Well Explorer Properties dialog boxes
• general data, such as well name, well depth, and vertical

section information
Note
Several additional fields are common to two or more applications, but not to all.
Drilling applications may share other data not listed.

Data Locking
You can prevent other people from making changes to data by locking
data at various levels and setting passwords. When locked, the data item
can only be opened in read-only mode; to keep changes, use Save As
or Export.
How Locking Works

You can lock Company properties only, or you can lock properties for
all levels below Company (Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, and
Case). Passwords can be set to prevent unlocking.
By default, no passwords are set, and the locked check box on all
Properties dialog boxes can be toggled on and off at will with no security
to prevent users from doing something they should not do.
In the Well Explorer, if a data item is locked, a small blue key appears
in the corner of its icon. When you open a locked data item, you will see
the following message:
This Design is locked and therefore Read-Only.

Changes to this Design will not be saved to the
database. To keep your changes, use the Save As or
Export options.
Locking Company Properties

For company data you want protected, two buttons are in the Company
Properties dialog box, Company Level and Locked Data. There is also a
check box named “Company is locked.”
When you click the Company Level button, you are prompted to set a
password to protect Company properties (and only the Company
properties). This password will then be required if a user wants to unlock
company properties and make changes.
After the password is set, select the Company is locked check box to
lock the Company properties and prevent unauthorized changes to
the data.

Locking Levels Below Company

When you click the Locked Data button on the Company Properties
dialog box, you are prompted to set a password. This password will then
be required if a user wants to unlock any level below the Company
(Projects, Sites, Wells, Wellbores, Designs, and Cases).
All levels are locked individually—you can lock a well, but levels below
it are not locked.
After the Locked Data password is set, you can lock properties for any
data level below Company and prevent unauthorized changes to the
data. Open the Properties dialog box for the data level you want to lock,
and select the locked check box. (For example, to lock a wellbore, open
the Wellbore Properties dialog box, and select to lock Wellbore.)
Locked Designs
When a design is locked, all associated items (Pore Pressure, Fracture Gradient,
Geothermal Gradient, and Wellpath) are also locked.

Concurrent Use of Same Data By Multiple Users
EDM supports concurrency for multiple users on the same data set. The
Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM) is the service used to regulate
concurrent access to the EDM database. For in-depth information about
SAM, see the EDM Administration Utility online help.
• By default, the SAM server is enabled and connected, and a green

SAM icon appears in the status bar of your application.
• If the SAM service is configured but not connected, the SAM icon
appears with a red X drawn through it. Consult your
System Administrator.
• If the SAM service is not configured, the SAM icon does not appear
in the status bar.
A good practice for any multi-user environment is to frequently press F5

to refresh the Well Explorer contents. Data updates (such as inserts,
updates, and deletions) are not always automatically recognized in other
EDM sessions and simultaneously running EDM applications.
How the Well Explorer Handles Concurrent Users

The Well Explorer and the Simultaneous Activity Monitor handle
concurrency as follows: If a user has a design open in Read/Write mode,
all other users can only open the design in Read-only mode. If no one
has opened the Read/Write mode to the design, it may be accessed.
The red SAM icon indicates that one or more users have this item
open, and you are restricted to opening it in Read-only mode. You
cannot save any changes to the database, but you can use Save As and
rename the item.
The blue SAM icon indicates that one or more users have this item open,
but you can still open it in Read/Write mode. You can save changes to
the database.
These SAM icons appear on a design (in the COMPASS, WELLPLAN,

StressCheck, and CasingSeat software) or a Well (in the OpenWells
software) in the Well Explorer.

Same User on Same Computer

If the same user has a design open in one EDM application and then
opens the same design in another EDM application on the same
machine, the blue SAM icon appears in the Well Explorer of the second
application. This icon indicates that this user has the Design locked for
use in Read/Write mode, and has it open in more than one application.
However, because it is the same user, the user can save changes to the
database made from either application.
Multiple Users, Different Computers

The first user to open a design or case in that well gets control, and the
design or case is then locked for use in Read/Write mode. A red SAM
icon indicates that more than one user is working with the Design or
Case at the same time. However, only the first user can make changes;
all other users open the design or case in Read-only mode. They can use
Save As but not Save.
After the user who had access to the design or case in Read/Write mode
closes the design or case, the red SAM icon disappears, and the design
or case is available again. Read-only users have to close the design or
case and reopen it to gain control.
(WELLPLAN software only) A user can save cases under a design that
is currently locked for Read/Write use by someone else.

Reload Notification
If you are working with any of the data in the following list and a user
with read/write privileges saves changes to the database, you will
receive a notification indicating that another user has changed the data
on which you are working.
You have the opportunity to use the changes saved to the database by the
other user. You also have the opportunity to save the data with which
you are working by using the Save As option. If you do not save your
data with Save As, your changes will be overwritten by those made by
the other user. (Your changes are only be overwritten if the other user
saves his changes and you indicate that you want to use those changes
when you receive notification.)
Note
If you have read privileges, any changes you make are only stored in memory and
are not written to the database unless you save your data with Save As.
Items that are refreshed in this manner are: Design, Definitive Survey
(Wellpath), Pore Pressure, Fracture Gradient, Geothermal Gradient, and
Assemblies (Casing Scheme).

Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM)
EDM (the Engineer’s Data Model) supports full concurrency for

multiple applications that are using the same data set through the
Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM).
If the Simultaneous Activity Monitor has not been configured, the

following message appears:
WELLPLAN could not connect to the SAM server.

Please verify that the settings are configured
correctly in the administration utility, and that
the SAM server is running.
The Simultaneous Activity Monitor consists of a Messaging Server that

notifies the user with an open application of all data currently open in
other applications. The SAM icon appears in the application status bar
as follows:
SAM Icon Indications

Icon Message Description
A green SAM icon in the status bar indicates that the Messenger
service is active.
A blue SAM icon with a red X on it indicates that the Messenger

Service is not currently active.
No Icon No icon appearing in the application status bar indicates that the
Simultaneous Activity Monitor has not been configured for
the application.
If a data item is open, an icon appears as follows:
• A red SAM icon indicates that one or more users on other PCs have
this item open, and the current user is restricted to Read-
only access.
• A blue SAM icon indicates that one or more users on the current PC
have this item open, but the current user still has full Read/Write
access. A user must be careful when making changes to the data
though this method enables data to automatically flow
between applications.

Importing and Exporting Data
The COMPASS software provides you with EDM database import and
export functionality, as well as DEX™ software file import and
export functionality.
Importing Data into the EDM™ Database

You can import data from one EDM database into another EDM
database, or you can import a DEX file.
Importing EDM™ Well Data from Another Database

To import well data from one EDM database to another, follow
these steps:
1. In the Well Explorer, select the EDM database canister.
2. From the Well Explorer right-click menu, select Import.
3. Select the .XML file that contains the well data you want to import,
and click Open. (Well data can be saved in .XML format by using
the Export command in the Well Explorer; For details, see page 2-
17.)
4. The well data is imported into the database.

Importing a DEX™ Software File into the Database

To import a DEX file into the EDM database, follow these steps:
1. Select File > Data Exchange > Import. The following dialog
box opens:
2. Specify the file name for the well information in the DEX format
you want to import, and click Open.
3. Use the arrow buttons to move the desired data items into the lower
list box. Single arrow buttons move the highlighted files. Double
arrow buttons move all files. (Use the up arrows to remove items
from the desired selection.)
4. Click OK to start the import.
5. The data is imported into memory and displayed in the main

window. The data has not yet been saved to the database. You may
make changes now, if you want.
6. When you are ready to save the changes to the database, select
File > Save. The Save As dialog box opens. Specify where in the
hierarchy you want to place the newly imported design, and name
the design. Click Save. The newly created design appears in the
Well Explorer tree.

Exporting Data from the EDM™ Database

You can export well data from the EDM database in .XML format. This
data can then be imported directly into another EDM database. You can
also export data in DEX format.
Exporting Data in XML Format

To export well data for import into another database, follow these steps:
1. In the Well Explorer, select the company, project, site, well,

wellbore, design, or case whose data you want to export, right-click,
and select Export from the pop-up menu.
2. Specify a file name for the information you want to export and click
Save. The parent and child data, and any linked pore pressures,
fracture gradients, and so on, are saved to the .XML file
you specified.
Exporting a Large Number of Wells
Problems might occur when exporting a company with a large number

of wells.
Exporting Well Data in DEX™ Software Format

To export well data as a DEX (.DXD) file, follow these steps:
1. Select File > Data Exchange > Export from the main menu.
2. Specify a file name for the well information you want to export in
DEX format and click Save. If this is the first time you have saved
DEX data using the specified file name, the export is complete at
this point. If the specified file exists, a dialog box opens to allow
you to specify which objects you want to export.
3. Use the arrow buttons to move the desired data items into the lower
list box. Single arrow buttons move the highlighted files. Double
arrow buttons move all files. (Use the up arrows to remove items
from the desired selection.)
4. Click OK to start the export. The data is saved to the .DXD file
you specified.

Wellbore Planner™ Software Import/Export

The Wellbore Planner™ software is a well planning application
integrated into the Landmark Geological and Geophysical visualization
Unix applications. Links with the COMPASS software enable Wellbore
Planner users (geologists/geophysicists) to quickly construct well
trajectories with COMPASS users (drillers), with both using their own
data sets. This integration reduces planning time by eliminating the
paper stage in which the details of the geologist’s targets are passed to
the engineer in an iterative process.
The COMPASS software can import and export data directly to the
Wellbore Planner software. This route also enables selective import of
OpenWorks® software well trajectories. This type of tool enables
planned trajectory or actual trajectory data to be easily shared between
the engineering and geoscience disciplines.
Wellbore Planner™ Software Import

This feature allow you to import *.WBP files from the Wellbore Planner
software. The file must be moved to the Windows® COMPASS
computer by FTP link.
The Import rules are as follows:
• If you are moving the data to an existing Company, Field, or Site,

open them before the import.
• If you do not want the import to interfere with existing data, open a
new Company. To access the File Open dialog box, from the
COMPASS main menu, select File > Import > Wellbore Planner.
Select the file to import (*.WBP).
If you are importing to an existing site, a message box appears

displaying the following:
Wellbore Planner™ Software Import Data

Click this... To import this...
All Data All data
WP Plans Wellbore Planner plans only
OW Wells OpenWorks wells surveys

If you have already chosen a site, the following message appears:
Importing file xxxx.wbp to site yyyy, click OK

to continue.
If the Map coordinates contained in the Wellbore Planner file disagree

with the current site, or disagree within itself, the data is still imported,
but you must check it, and the following message appears:
Well xxxx has strange starting coordinates
Wellbore Planner™ Software Export

This feature exports a file in the Wellbore Planner format for import to
a geological application, such as the OpenVision™ software. The file
must be moved from the COMPASS software for Windows PC via FTP.
In the COMPASS software, open the Customer, Field, and Site of
interest. Then, from the COMPASS main menu, select File > Export >
Wellbore Planner. The COMPASS software then asks the name and
destined location of the export file.
DIMS™ Software for Windows® Survey Import

The DIMS™ software for Windows is the Landmark Drilling and Well
Services Daily Drilling and Completions Reporting System (DIMS).
Typically, the DIMS software is used at the rig site as part of a client’s
daily drilling reporting procedure. Built-in links between the
COMPASS software and the DIMS software for Windows enables easy
transfer of survey information from the DIMS software to the
COMPASS software to reduce survey data-entry duplication.
To access the DIMS survey import tool, open a wellpath in the

COMPASS software to which you want to import surveys. The DIMS
survey import also requires an ODBC data source that you use to access
the DIMS for Windows database. A database connection is the PC’s
mappings of how software applications should open a database. Both the
COMPASS software and the DIMS software for Windows require
defined ODBC connections before the applications run. Consult your
systems administrator to build a DIMS ODBC data source if one is
not available.

Well
Select a DIMS well from the pull-down list. The COMPASS software
populates the SideTrack list box with the sidetracks for that well defined
within the DIMS software.
Sidetrack
Select a DIMS sidetrack from which the COMPASS software will
import surveys. Each unique survey tool within the DIMS software for
the sidetrack is displayed in the Tool Mappings grid.
Tool Mappings
The DIMS survey tools must be mapped to equivalent COMPASS
survey tools. This mapping is necessary because there is no connection
between them, and the COMPASS software requires a correct tool
mapping to calculate positional uncertainty. You must do this for all
DIMS tools before starting the import. The COMPASS software
remembers survey tool mappings for future use.
When mappings are complete, click the OK button. The COMPASS

software imports the DIMS data, creating a separate survey for each one
of the mappings.

Using Datums in EDM ™
Definition of Terms Associated With Datums

This section defines datum terms. They are grouped by the Properties
dialog box in which they are found.
Project Properties
System Datum
The System Datum is set in the Project Properties/General dialog box
and represents absolute zero. It is the surface depth datum from which
all well depths are measured, and all well depths are stored in the
database relative to this datum. Usually, the System Datum is mean sea
level, mean ground level, or lowest astronomical tide, but it can also be
the wellhead, rigfloor, RKB, and so on.
Elevation
The Elevation is set in the Project Properties/General dialog box, and
represents the elevation above mean sea level. (If Mean Sea Level is
selected as the System Datum, Elevation is grayed out.)
Well Properties
Depth Reference Datum

The Depth Reference Datum represents zero MD. It is sometimes
known as the local datum, and it is measured as an elevation from the
System Datum. You can define one or more Depth Reference Datums
for a well in the Depth Reference tab (Well Properties dialog box). For
each Depth Reference Datum, you must specify the elevation above or
below the System Datum.
The selected default Depth Reference datum in the list box is the
viewing datum in all applications (the viewing datum can be changed on
the fly only in the OpenWells and COMPASS applications).

You cannot delete or change the elevation of a Depth Reference datum

after it is referenced by a Design.
Offshore Check Box

Select the Offshore check box to indicate an offshore well or leave it
unselected to indicate a land well.
Subsea Check Box (Offshore Well)

Select the Subsea check box to indicate this offshore well is subsea.
Ground Elevation (Land Well)

This value is the elevation of the ground above the System Datum. It is
set in the Depth Reference tab (Well Properties dialog box).
Water Depth (Offshore Well)

This value is the total depth of the column of water (MSL to mudline).
It is referenced to Mean Sea Level.
Mudline Depth (Only For Offshore Subsea Well)

This value is the depth below system datum (such as MSL/LAT) of the
wellhead flange.
Wellhead Depth (Subsea Well)

This value is the distance from the wellhead to the system datum. It is
used in some calculations as the hanging depth for casing leads when
they are set. To determine wellhead depth:
Wellhead Depth (to rig floor) = Depth Reference Datum + Wellhead Depth
Wellhead Depth (set in the Well Properties/General dialog box) is

positive for offshore subsea and negative for wellheads above MSL (that
is, onshore or offshore platform). So, it does not matter in the preceding
calculation whether it is offshore or subsea. Depth Reference Datum is
always positive. Both wellhead depth and wellhead elevation are
distances from the system datum to the flange.

Wellhead Elevation (Platform and Land Wells)

Wellhead Elevation is the height above system datum (MSL/LAT) of
the wellhead flange (surface casing). It may happen that for some land
wells using ground level as the system datum that the user may have to
enter a negative value because the wellhead “cellar” is often below
the ground.
Air Gap (Calculated)

Air Gap is the distance from the system datum to the rig floor. It is used
in some calculations for hydrostatic head. This value is always positive.
To calculate air gap, the application uses:
• Air Gap (offshore wells) = Depth Reference Datum – Elevation
• Air Gap (land wells) = Depth Reference Datum – Ground Level
Elevation is set in the Project Properties/General dialog box. Ground

Level is set in the Well Properties/ Depth Reference dialog box.
Design Properties
Depth Reference Information

From the pull-down list of defined Depth Reference datums, select the
datum you want to reference for this design. After you select a datum,
the Datum Elevation, Air Gap, current System Datum, Mudline Depth,
and Mudline TVD are all updated/calculated and displayed adjacent to
the rig elevation drawing on the Design Properties dialog box.
Setting Up Datums for Your Design

1. In the General dialog box (Project Properties > General), select
the system datum you want to use.
2. In the General dialog box’s Elevation field, enter the value the
system datum is above mean sea level. If your system datum is
below mean sea level, this number is negative. If your system
datum is mean sea level, Elevation is grayed out.

3. In the Depth Reference dialog box (Well Properties > Depth

Reference), if the well is offshore:
a) Select Offshore and enter the water depth below the

system datum.
b) If the well is subsea, select Subsea and enter the wellhead depth
below the system datum.
4. In the Well Properties dialog box in the Depth Reference tab, if the
well is a land well, make sure the Offshore check box is not
selected and enter the ground level elevation above the
system datum.
5. In the Well Properties dialog box in the Depth Reference tab, define
the depth reference datums you want to use, such as RKB or
Rigfloor. Type the elevation above the system datum in the
Elevation field, and specify the effective date for the datum.
6. Import or create a design for this well.
7. In the Design Properties dialog box in the General tab, select the
depth reference datum you want to use for this design from the
pull-down list of datums that you defined in step 5.

Chapter 3
Using the Well Explorer
Overview
In this chapter, you will become familiar with using the Well Explorer.
You will expand your knowledge of the hierarchical levels of the
EDM™ database that was discussed in the last chapter.
In this section of the course, you will:
• become familiar with the components of the Well Explorer.
• become familiar with the data levels accessible by using the

Well Explorer.
• become familiar with the items associated with each data level.

Chapter 3: Using the Well Explorer
Introducing the Well Explorer
In the COMPASS™software, the Well Explorer is located in the right

pane of the application window. This location differs from other
drilling applications, such as the WELLPLAN™ software, where it is
located by default on the left side of the application window. Well
Explorer functions much like the Microsoft® Windows® Explorer. It is
organized as a hierarchical data tree. You can browse the EDM
database at the following hierarchical levels: Companies, Projects,
Sites, Wells, Wellbores, and Designs.
Currently selected data Well Explorer
item (a prototype design)

Use the Well Explorer to:
• browse, open, copy, delete, create, and otherwise manipulate the

main data items. The currently open item is highlighted. Details of
the data hierarchy are discussed in “Describing the Data Structure”
on page 2-3.
• Drag-and-drop data between hierarchical levels. For example, you

can select a project associated with one company and copy it to
another company. When you copy the project, all the data (sites,
wellbores, and so on) associated with the project are also copied.
Well Explorer Components
The Tree
The hierarchical tree functions much like Microsoft Windows Explorer.
You can view and manipulate different levels within the EDM data
model hierarchy, similarly to using a directory tree.
Operations are as follows:
• MB1 is used to expand or contract branches of the data tree and to

select. Click + to expand the hierarchy and click - to contract it.
• MB3 has a context-sensitive menu. Depending on the hierarchical

level you have highlighted (Company, Project, Sites, Wells,
Wellbores, Wells, Design, Cases, Wellpaths, Pore Pressure Groups,
Fracture Gradient Groups, Geothermal Gradient Groups, Hole
Section Groups, Assemblies, Fluids, and Catalogs), the menu
populates with the relevant options (New data item, New
Attachment, Copy, Paste, Delete, Properties, and so on).
Associated Data Components

Data components that can be associated with a design or case are
displayed in the Associated Data Viewer at the bottom of the
Well Explorer.
Data Components Associated with a Design

Data components that can be associated with a design are: Attached
Documents, Fracture Gradient Groups, Pore Pressure Groups,

Geothermal Gradient Groups, and the Wellpath associated with the

design. For more information, see “Associated Components” on page 2-
5.
The Recent Bar

To save time, you can use the Recent bar to select a recently used design
instead of browsing for the desired item in the Well Explorer.
The Filter Bar

To save time, use the Filter bar to create new search parameters or use
previously created searches.
Displaying/Sizing the Well Explorer and Recent Bar

In the COMPASS software, the components of the Well Explorer are
always displayed. However, you can customize the size of the Well
Explorer in two ways.
To change the size of the Well Explorer:
• Maximize or minimize the Well Explorer by clicking

Maximize/Minimize.
• Resize the Well Explorer by using your mouse. To do this, use the
mouse to position the cursor over a Well Explorer border. The
cursor changes from a singe arrow to a horizontal double-arrow.
Left-click and drag the border to alter the size of the Well Explorer.
Positioning the Well Explorer

If the Well Explorer is in the restored state, you can reposition it with
your mouse. Move the cursor to the top border, left-click, then drag the
Well Explorer to the area you prefer.

Tracking Data Modifications

In the COMPASS software, you can track modification of data by using
the Audit Information tab (on the Properties dialog box for each
data type).
Using the Well Explorer, right-click on a data type icon to display the
right-click menu items. Select Properties to display the Properties
dialog box, then click the Audit Information tab to display it. This tab
provides information on the data modifications for this item.
Drag-and-drop Rules
Drag-and-drop in the Well Explorer functions somewhat like the
Microsoft Windows Explorer. You can use drag-and-drop to copy
Companies, Projects, Sites, Wells, Wellbores, Designs, and Cases, as
well as associated data items and attached documents.
All drag-and-drop operations copy the data—data is never cut or moved.

Drag-and-drop the item to copy it from one location and paste it into
another. The item and all associated data are copied and pasted.
You can drag-and-drop associated items (Wellpaths, Pore Pressures,

Fracture Gradients, Geothermal Gradients, Hole Sections, Assemblies,
and so on.) into open designs or cases from the Associated Data Viewer
at the base of the Well Explorer. The application automatically updates
itself with the copied data.
Some rules:
• You cannot drag-and-drop an actual design. However, if you copy a

wellbore, any actual designs under that wellbore are copied. This
rule is also true for copying done at the Well, Site, Project, and
Company level.
• You cannot drag a wellpath from the Associated Data Viewer into
an actual design.
• If you drag a planned or prototype design to a different project,

targets are not copied with the design. As a result, the plan will no
longer have any targets associated with it.
• Depending on where a Design sidetrack Wellbore is dropped, Plan

and Survey tie-on information may be lost and, as a result, the
survey program may be missing information.
• (In the COMPASS software only) If a Survey is dropped onto a

Wellbore or Actual Design in another Company, the Survey loses
its tool information.
• You cannot drag-and-drop Catalogs. Instead, you must use the

right-click menu Copy and Paste functions.
Well Explorer Right-click Menus

When you click on something in the Well Explorer (a Well, Design, and
so on.), right-clicking brings up a menu of options pertinent to that
hierarchical level. The options on each hierarchical level are
discussed below.

Working at the Database Level

When a database is selected in the Well Explorer, the following
right-click menu items are available:
Database Menu Items
Command Description
New Company Display the Company Properties dialog box to create a

new company
New Folder Use the Folder Properties dialog box to create a new virtual
(Database Level) folder or edit the properties of an existing folder.
Instant Plan Use Instant Plan to quickly create a new plan. This command
displays the Instant Plan dialog box, which allows you to
quickly select the hierarchy you want: Company, Project,
Site, Well, Wellbore, and Plan from pull-down lists of
existing database entries. After making your selections, click
OK to create the plan.
Instant Survey Use Instant Survey to quickly create a new survey. This
command displays the Instant Survey dialog box, which
allows you to quickly select the hierarchy you want:
Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, and Survey from
pull-down lists of existing database entries. After making
your selections, click OK to create the survey.
Import Import the Company Level transfer file.
Well Name Display a submenu from which you can select how to name
the wells in your project.
Wellbore Name Display a submenu from which you can select how to name
the wellbores in your project.
Virtual Folder Hide and show folders in the Well Explorer.
Change History Record and view information related to recent changes to

wellbores and designs.
Lithologies Display the Lithologies Editor. Use the Lithology Editor to

configure bitmaps to Lithology names that can be used in
formation columns for section views.
Backup/Restore Backup: Launch a backup of your open database.

Restore: Restore a backup.
Find Search for business objects in the Well Explorer tree. Two
methods are available: simple and advanced.

Database Menu Items

Command Description (Continued)
Refresh Refresh (update) the Well Explorer tree with any changed
information. Pressing F5 is another way to refresh.
Expand All Expand all levels below the Database level.
Collapse All Collapse all levels below the Database level. For more
information see “Collapse All (Database Level)” on page 3-
14.
New Company (Database Level)

To create a new company, select the database canister. Right-click, and
select New Company. The Company Properties dialog box opens. For
more information about using the Company Properties dialog box, see
“Properties (Company Level)” on page 3-25.
New Folder (Database Level)

The Folder Properties General tab is used to create a new virtual folder
in the Well Explorer. Selecting the Folder is Locked check box locks
folder information on this dialog box.
Enter a name to identify the virtual folder.

The name must be unique.
Enter a short description if needed.

This field is optional.
If the Folder is Locked check box is

selected, changes cannot be made to the
data in this dialog box. While a folder is
locked, a lock icon displays on the Virtual
Folder icon. Data cannot be copied into or
out of a locked folder.

Instant Plan (Database Level)

Use this dialog box to quickly and easily create the hierarchy required
to start a plan, from the company all the way down to the wellbore. This
dialog box allows you to enter minimal information and saves you from
having to go through the individual property dialog boxes at each level
of the hierarchy.
Select the company, project, and site from

the pull-down list of existing companies,
projects, or sites. You can also enter a new
name for the data level.
Enter the name of the well,

wellbore, and plan.
Use the pull-down list to select a geodetic

system. This is the general mapping
system (for example, Universal
Transverse Mercator).
If available, use the pull-down list to

select the geodetic datum. This
defines the center and radii of the
projection in this location (for
example, ED50).
Use the pull-down list to Enter the map coordinates

select the zone within the of the site center location
system, for example, UTM based on the geodetic
Zone 31, North 0 to 6 E. system selected above.

Instant Survey (Database Level)

Use the Instant Survey dialog box to quickly and easily create the
hierarchy required to start a survey, from the company all the way down
to the wellbore. This dialog box allows you to enter minimal
information and saves you from having to go through the individual
Property dialog boxes at each level of the hierarchy.
For information about

entering data, see
“Instant Plan (Database
Level)” on page 3-9.
Import (Database Level)

Use the Import dialog box to import a company level data transfer file.

Well Name (Database Level)

This option displays a submenu from which you can select how to name
the wells in your project. The options are:
• Common Name is a short/abbreviated well name given to a well

for day-to-day reference.
• Legal Name is a formal well name assigned for

documentation purposes.
• Universal Identifier is a coded well name that varies from region

to region.
• Slot Name appends the chosen well name with the slot name if
available
Note
You can choose only one of the naming options: Common Name, Legal Name, or
Universal Identifier. You can use Slot Name in conjunction with the other
naming conventions.
Wellbore Name (Database Level)

This option displays a submenu from which you can select how to name
the wellbores in your project. The options are:
• Common Name is a short/abbreviated well name given to a well

for day-to-day reference.
• Legal Name is a formal well name assigned for

documentation purposes.
• Universal Identifier is a coded well name that varies from region

to region
Note
You can choose only one of the naming options: Common Name, Legal Name, or
Universal Identifier.
Virtual Folders (Database Level)

This option causes the folder option in all hierarchies below to be
disabled or enabled.

Change History
Change History provides historical audit information related to
wellbores, designs, and cases in the associated Properties dialog boxes.
The Change History is populated by Engineer's Desktop™ applications
whenever additions, deletions, or modifications to design-entered data
are made. Specifically, changes are recorded when a user adds to,
updates, deletes, runs (the WELLPLAN and COMPASS software only),
and copies data within EDM.
Note
Use ChangeHistoryLogging in the EDM Administration Utility to enable or disable

the recording of Change History.
Lithologies (Database Level)

The Lithologies command displays the Lithology Editor dialog box. Use
this dialog box to configure bitmaps to lithology names that may then be
used in formation columns for section views.
The texture sample

for the selected
item is shown here.
To define a lithology using the Lithology Editor, do the following:
1. Enter a lithology name in the left column grid. This name must
be unique.
2. Select a lithology texture by clicking the Browse button

(labelled ‘:’) and then choosing a bitmap file using the Open dialog
box (File > Open). You may observe the selected texture in the area
below the grid.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 until the required set is complete.
4. Click OK to save the lithology list.

Backup/Restore
The Backup/Restore options are available for MSDE databases only.
Backup
The Backup Options dialog box allows you to:
• turn backup reminders on or off.

• set a reminder time interval.
• set a stale backup time, where backups older than this time interval
are automatically deleted.
Restore
Use the Database Restore option to restore a backup. The COMPASS
software warns you if you try to restore a backup of one database over a
different database.
Find (Database Level)

Use this command to search for business objects in the Well Explorer
tree. Two methods are available for searching for data: Simple and
Advanced. The Simple Find command helps you quickly navigate to
Well Explorer nodes that carry unique names. Advanced Find searches
across numerous business objects within the Well Explorer tree.
Advanced Find also provides a mechanism to translate searches into
filters that are saved on the local machine for later use.
• To use Simple search mode, click the Find icon, which is located in
the toolbar, or select a Well Explorer tree node and press Ctrl-F.
• To use Advanced search mode, click the Advanced Find >>

button, which is in the bottom right of the Find in Tree dialog box.

The Advanced search allows for a more detailed search of business

objects using specified criteria. After criteria have been configured, the
search can be performed and also saved as a filter. This filter can be
applied to the Well Explorer tree and used at any time in the main
application window.
Refresh (Database Level)

Use this command to update the Well Explorer tree to show any
additions, changes, and deletions. Pressing F5 also refreshes the
Well Explorer.
Expand All (Database Level)

This command expands all nodes below the selected level in the Well
Explorer tree.
Collapse All (Database Level)

This command collapses all nodes below the selected level in the Well
Explorer tree.
Working at the Company Level
Open (Company Level)

Use this option to open a selected company.
New Project (Company Level)

Use this option to create a new project. Select a company, right-click,
and then select New Project.

The fields and controls on the Project Properties dialog box are
explained in detail on “Properties (Project Level)” on page 3-42.
New Attachment (Company Level)

Use this dialog box to associate a document or picture. Documents can
be of any type with a recognized extension (such as Word, Excel, text
file, JPG, and so on).
New Folder (Company Level)

Use the Folder Properties dialog box to create a new virtual folder or edit
the properties of an existing folder.
Paste (Company Level)

Use this command to paste (insert) the contents of the Clipboard at the
location currently selected in the Well Explorer.
You must first copy (save) company data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Company Level)

Use this command to rename the item. You can also rename the data
hierarchy item by highlighting it and then clicking it once. Type the new
name in the box that appears around the current name.
Delete (Company Level)

Use this command to remove the selected company from the database.
A confirmation box opens and asks if you are sure you want to delete the
company and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Company Level)

Export the company level and its sub-branch data to a transfer file.

Survey Tools (Company Level)

This command displays the Survey Tools dialog box. A survey tool is
an instrument that is used to measure the wellbore’s position using
inclination and azimuth measurements, followed by survey computation
or by directly integrating inertial positions.
Survey tools are used in the COMPASS software to describe the error
characteristics associated with the tool. The tool’s error characteristics
are used to calculate the magnitude of measurement uncertainty about
the wellbore.
The COMPASS software enables you to define different survey tools

with different error models. Generally, every survey tool operated at one
or more different conditions should have an error model defined. The
tools should have logical names so they can be intuitively selected from
the Survey or Planning modules.
Check box and then

click to open
diagnostics report
when survey errors
are calculated.
Survey Tool Error Models

A survey tool error model describes how wellpath positional uncertainty
is calculated. When you run anticollision, the COMPASS software uses
the error calculated around each wellpath based on the error model
defined and the survey tools used.
For a particular tool, you only need to enter parameters for the error
model selected. For example, if the model is error cone, you do not need
to enter error values for the systematic error, ISCWSA, or inclination
cone of error grid.
The three supported error models are:
• Cone of Error – For a range of inclinations, you may enter a

different error cone expansion rate.
• Systematic Error – Enter six coefficients for the survey instrument

components of error.

• ISCWSA – An extensible survey error modeling system with

configurable error terms and weighting functions.
You must assign a survey tool to the most appropriate error model with
accurate parameters. This information is most commonly provided by
the survey contractor. You should be able to e-mail, phone, or fax any
survey contractor and request precise details of the error model for a
particular tool. Otherwise, you can find descriptions of many survey tool
error models on the Internet on web sites for Sperry-Sun®, SDC,
Anadrill, and so on.
In contrast, some operators (for example, BPA and Shell) decide what
the error model and parameter values are for a tool. This information
assumes some form of testing or statistical treatment of available survey
data measured by that tool.
Regardless of where the information is obtained, definition of a survey

tool error model is critical. A COMPASS anticollision scan is only as
good as the survey tool error model itself.
Cone of Error
For a range of inclinations, you can enter different error cone expansion
rates. The following example shows that, from 15 to 35 degrees
inclination, the cone of error expands at 5.0/1000 ft (or 5 m/1000 m) of
measured depth.

The following dialog box depicts the Survey Tool Editor for a tool that
is using the Cone of Error model:
Enter end of range for the

error term. (Note: Grid
starts at 0 degrees.)
Enter the expansion rate

per 1,000 units.

Survey Tool/Folder Attachment
Files and folders can now be attached to individual survey tools through
the Survey tools dialog.
Systematic Error Ellipse

This model is based on SPE paper 9223 by C.J.M. Wolff and
J.P. de Wardt, which was first published in the Journal of Petroleum
Technology in December, 1981. The model is a statistical treatment of
the distribution of errors caused by internal and external influences. The
paper demonstrates that the major causes of error are systematic (that is,
they happen consistently in one vector direction) from one survey
reading to the next. Some error sources are random, but they are
assumed to be small and tend to cancel out over a number of survey
readings. The mathematical methods applied by the paper have become
industry standard, but some of the example coefficient values and
weightings are not capable of modelling modern directional survey
instruments (that is, MWD and Rate Gyroscopes).
The Systematic Ellipse error model has six coefficients:
• Relative Depth Error – The amount of error in depth reading per

1,000 (ft or m) of measured depth. Depth error is derived from pipe

tally measurement and stretch for pipe run tools and wireline
measurement error for cable run tools.
• Misalignment Error – The error due to misalignment of the survey

tool in the borehole. Misalignment affects both inclination and
azimuth and is derived from sensor axis and tool centralizer
misalignment.
• True Inclination Error – This error may be derived from

weight-induced effects on pipe running gear and is sensitive
to inclination.
• Compass Reference Error – The error in referencing North. For

magnetic surveys, this is the error in declination reading for the
locality. For gyro surveys, this is the error in surface azimuth
orientation-foresight.
• Drillstring Magnetization (Magnetization Error) – The error in

magnetic azimuth readings caused by drillstring magnetization. The
error increases at higher inclinations and east/west azimuth.
• Gyrocompass Azimuth – The error in gimballed gyro azimuth

readings caused by gyro drift. Note that the Wolff and deWardt
weighting for this term is 1/cos(inclination), which means that the
derived error results will “explode” at higher inclinations. The term
is meant to describe film read level rotor gyroscopes, which should
only be used at lower angles. To describe a modern rate/continuous
gyro in the systematic error model, you need to use the Inclination
Azimuth error grid, which allows constant weighted terms.
Because of the variation of error parameters along the x, y, z vectors, the

resultant shape of the error surface is an ellipse as projected in 2D, and
an ellipsoid as plotted in 3D. The orientation of the ellipsoid with respect
to the wellpath is dependent on the relative change of wellpath
inclination and azimuth.
The Systematic Error model coefficients and their weighting factors are
recognized as being inadequate for modern solid state magnetic
instruments and for rate gyroscopes. The COMPASS software provides
the inclination/azimuth error grid to help define error models for more
complex instruments. Again, the inclination and azimuth error
characteristics for each inclination angle range can be provided by the
manufacturers and inserted into the tables.
These error characteristics are substituted for the respective inclination

and azimuth error of the Wolff and de Wardt coefficients; therefore, the

True Inclination Error, Drillstring Magnetization, and Gyrocompass

Azimuth coefficients are grayed-out. The inclination weighting factors
would not be applied because of the relationship defined in the table.
The Interpolate toggle enables error values to be determined for
intermediate inclinations between the ranges entered.
ISCWSA
The Industry Steering Committee for Wellbore Survey Accuracy has
built a survey instrument error model specifically for solid state
magnetic instruments (for example, MWD and EMS). The model is
based on a paper published by H.Williamson “Accuracy Prediction for
Directional MWD” as SPE56702. The model vastly extends the work
started with the Systematic Error model and incorporates the experience
of the many participating parties. The COMPASS software has
extended the model by including a format for defining error terms.
The error terms for this type of survey instrument should be entered in
the grid. The error value and weighting formula are entered, as well as
the vector direction and treatment at survey tie-on.
A row in the grid may be for an individual source of error that can be
from instrument reading, depth measurement, instrument barrel-hole/
collar alignment, and external reference and interference terms.
The columns in the grid are as follows:
Name
Give the error source a unique name unless you want it added on to the
same source of error from another or the same tool. To clarify what is in
individual error term, see the Tie-on definition.
Vector
Vector sets the vector direction for the error source. Make a selection
from the pull-down list:
• A Azimuth error (WdW)
• B Azimuth bias
• D Depth error (WdW)

• E Depth error (ISCWSA)
• F Depth bias (for example, Wireline stretch outrun)
• I Inclination error (highside)
• J Inclination bias (uncorrected sag)
• L Lateral error (error at 90/270 toolface equivalent to azimuth

error/sin (inclination))
• M Misalignment (forms a disc about the wellpath)
• N Inertial error (forms a sphere about the wellpath)
Value
The error value for the source of error; that is, 1.0-degree reference. Care
must be specified to what confidence level and unit type for the error
value. The confidence level for the uncertainty is stated in the Customer
Properties. To get extra precision for this column data, change the
“Coefficient of Friction” unit type in the Units Editor.
Tie-on
Tie-on determines how an error source is tied onto sources of the same
name from other tools. Make a selection from the pull-down list:
• R Random—error is added by RSS (Root Sum Squares) from

station to station. (For example, Misalignment for
rotating MWD)
• S Systematic—error is added directly from station to station

run but added randomly at tie-on.
• W Well—error is systematic throughout the well. (For

example, Reference error)
• G Global—error is systematic across a number of wells. (For

example, Crustal Declination error)
• N not used in error accumulation (This term is used as an

intermediate calculation.)

Units
The following unit selections are available to select from the
pull-down list:
• N no unit conversion
• M meters to feet conversion, equivalent to MTF in the formula
• IM inverse feet to meters conversion, equivalent to 1/MTF in

the formula
• D degrees to radians conversion, equivalent to DTR in

the formula
• T error per thousand feet, equivalent to a conversion of 0.001
Other unit types may be given but are not interpreted.
Formula
The formula is the weighting for each error term and is given as a
formula that can be parsed like Excel. Typical arithmetic conventions
can be used, such as: * / - +, power: X^Y, trigonometry: SIN(), COS(),
TAN(), ABS(), and so on.
Range
Select this check box to specify an inclination range for this error term.
This term will only be included when the survey station inclination is
between the Min Inc and Max Inc, inclusive.
Example
# Model for Wolff & deWardt, Poor Magnetic. This
example shows use
# of a bias error term MAGB.
#Name Vector Tie-On Value Formula
DEPTH D S 2 THO
MISAL M S 0.3 DTR
TINC I S 1 DTR*SIN(INC)

REF A S 1.5 DTR
MAGE A S 5 DTR*SIN(INC)*ABS(SIN(AZM))
MAGB B S 5 DTR*SIN(INC)*ABS(SIN(AZM))
To create a new tool

1. Click New to prepare the editor for a new survey tool.
2. Enter a unique name for this survey tool (you may use the same
name to identify the same tool in a different company).
3. If you want, enter a description of the tool.
4. Click the button next to the model type to enter the errors you
expect from this survey tool.
5. Click Save to add this tool to the list.
To edit an existing tool

1. In the Survey Tools list, click the tool you want to edit.
The tool is highlighted, and the Tool Properties dialog box is

displayed for the selected tool.
2. Make the required changes.
3. Click Save to update the tool.
Using the Save Button
After you click Save, you may see a message box: "A number of Wellbores
use this tool…Do you want to rebuild them now?" Clicking Yes rebuilds the
definitive surveys with the new error data. The update process can take
some time.
To delete a survey tool

1. In the Survey Tools list, click the tool you want to delete.
2. Click Delete. You can only delete tools that are not used by the
COMPASS software.

If a tool you want to delete is used by any definitive path, a warning

message displays that provides instructions for removing any links
to the tool that are defined in Surveys or Plans. It can be difficult to
locate all references for a tool.
To export a survey tool

Export Survey Tools allow you to transfer tool data between companies
and systems.
1. In the Survey Tools list, click the tool you want to export.
2. Click Export.
3. Enter the file name to create. The default file name is

Toolname.ipm in the COMPASS/Output directory.
To import a survey tool

Import Survey Tools allows you to have a common set of tools sites
within a company.
1. Ensure you do not have a tool selected in the Survey Tools list.
2. Click Import.
3. Enter the directory name and select the file name to import. These
file names should have an extension of .IPM.
Properties (Company Level)

Use this command to view or edit company properties. The Company
Properties dialog box opens. The Company Properties dialog box is used
to create a new company and to provide information regarding creation
and modification of the company. In the COMPASS software, the
company controls policy and settings for a number of operating projects
or sites. The company is either an operating group within your
exploration company or an operating company for which a contractor is
providing services. The company unit should have common directional
drilling operating practices and policies. The Company Properties tabs
are used to specify the survey and anticollision policy for the group.

Using the Company Properties > General Tab
A company logo can be selected

to appear consistently in reports
and wall plots.
A Company Level
password enables
settings to be
applied
consistently within
an organization.
Locked Data
passwords enable
field, sites, wells
and wellpaths to be
locked to
prevent changes.

Using the Company Properties > Anticollision Tab(s)
Survey Error Model
Error System
Use the pull-down list to select the error system. The options are:
ISCWSA and Cone of Error. For more information about the
ISCWA Survey Error Model, see “ISCWSA” on page 3-21.
Output Errors are at_sigma

Enter a numeric value. This value states the confidence level for the
survey errors in number of standard deviations. The errors defined
in the survey instrument error models have to be defined at a known
standard. Error terms are expressed in standard deviations from the
mean (or sigma). One standard deviation implies that roughly 65%
of readings will be within the stated error. Two standard deviations
require that 95% of readings will be within the stated error.
Confidence levels are required to make risk-based decisions on
collision and target intercept calculations.

Using the Company Properties > Anticollision Alerts Tab
Using the Company Properties > Partners Tab

Anticollision Settings
Scan Method
When selecting a scan method, you define how wellbore separation
is computed. A number of different methods are available for
computing the distance from the current wellbore to other wells.
Four scan methods are available in the COMPASS

software, including:
• Closest Approach 3D – At each MD interval on the reference

wellpath, the COMPASS software computes the distance to the
closest point on the offset wellpath. At the scan depth on your
reference wellpath, imagine an expanding bubble or spheroid.
The minimum distance occurs when the surface of the spheroid
just touches the offset wellpath. Because the offset wellpath is
now at a tangent to your spherical bubble, the line of closest
approach is perpendicular to your offset wellpath.
The following graphic depicts the 3D Closest Approach Scan

Method (left), and the traveling Cylinder method (right):

• Traveling Cylinder – This scan method uses a plane

perpendicular to the reference wellpath and intercepting offset
wellpaths as they cut through the plane. The surface resembles a
cylinder with the size of the maximum scan radius. The traveling
cylinder method computes distance from the offset wellpath
stations back to the reference wellpath. The benefit of this
method is that intercepts are detected even when the wellpaths
are approaching at a perpendicular. In this case, more than one
point may be in the Traveling Cylinder plane for the same depth
on the reference. Depths are interpolated on the offset wellpaths,
resulting in irregular depths on the reference wellpath.
Therefore, the 3D anticollision view and traveling cylinders
depth slice option are not possible with this method because they
rely on regular depths on the reference.
• Horizontal Plane – This method is the horizontal distance from

the reference wellpath to the offset wellpath.
The following graphic depicts the Horizontal Scan Method:

• Trav Cylinder North – This scan method uses the same

perpendicular plane as the Traveling Cylinder scan method, but
toolface orientation from reference to offset is added to current
Wellbore direction. The traveling cylinder plot is oriented to
Map North when the reference well is at low angles. Toolface
angle to an offset well is then reported as the angle from the
high-side of your current wellbore plus the azimuth of your
current wellbore. This method avoids the confusion in the
Traveling Cylinders plot caused by large changes in toolface
angle when kicking off from vertical.
Error Surface
When selecting an error surface, you define the shape of the
uncertainty envelope about the wellbore. The error surface choice
allows the user to override the standard ellipse to ellipse (default)
ratio calculations in anticollision, and instead uses the largest
dimension of error at a point to define a cone about the wellbore. In
most cases, this will be the major axis of the ellipsoid. Using the
circular conic method is more conservative and produces lower ratio
values and hence more warnings. The choices are as follows:
• Elliptical Conic – The elliptical conic method interpolates the

error surface in each wellbore by assuming the surface is an
ellipse with major and minor axis perpendicular to the wellbore.
Because the center-to-center plane can intersect the error
ellipsoid at any direction from the wellbore, the resulting radius
used in the separation factor calculation ranges from the
minimum dimension of the ellipse (minor axis) to a maximum
dimension (major axis). The ellipse also has an intermediate axis
with a magnitude somewhere between the minor and major
axis dimensions.
• Circular Conic – The circular conic method uses the largest

dimension (major axis) of the error ellipsoid at a point to define
a spheroid about the wellbore. Projected down the wellbore, this
becomes a cone. Using the circular conic method is always the
most conservative because it uses the largest dimension of the
ellipse. Therefore, it produces lower ratio values and
more warnings.

• Combined Covariance – This method combines the errors on

the reference and offset by covariance addition before any
distance calculations are performed. The error distance is then
computed by the “elliptical conic” method on the resulting
single ellipsoid. Where Casings are included, the radii are
subtracted from the center-to-center distance. The separation
factor derived from the combined covariance technique can be
directly correlated to collision risk as it represents the standard
deviation value for the “tail of the probability distribution.”
Casings
Choose one of three options:
• No – Casing diameters are not applied.
• Add – Casing diameters are added to the error ellipse

dimensions. The calculation is:
Separation Factor Ratio = Center to Center Distance /

(Reference Error Radius + Offset Error Radius + Offset Casing
Radius + Reference Hole Radius)
• Subtract – Casing diameters are subtracted from the

center-to-center distance. The calculation is:
Separation Factor Ratio = (Center-to-Center Distance - Offset

Casing Radius - Reference Hole Radius) / (Reference Error
Radius + Offset Error Radius)
Using the Subtract option
Be aware that when using the Subtract option, it is possible to have a

center-to-center distance that is negative in top-hole.
Warning Type
Several methods are available to warn of potential collision
problems. The choice made here will decide how the anticollision
warning levels are used. The options are:
• Error Ratio – The warning given depends on the ratio of the

separation distance divided by the combined error radii of the
reference and offset wells at a given depth.

• Depth Ratio – The warning given depends on the ratio of the

separation distance divided by the depth times a ratio (that is, 
10/1000 MD). Error values may be added to this cone.
• Rules Based – Each offset wellbore is assigned with a rule. A

warning is given if the rule fails.
Warning Levels or Rules

This grid is used to define a number of anticollision warning criteria.
The columns and labels that appear on this dialog box depend on
which warning type is chosen in the Anticollision Settings section of
the Company Properties dialog box. The warning type determines
the appearance of this grid. See this table for details. For specific
information on using this grid, see the online help.
Using the Company Properties > Calc Defaults Tab
Survey Calculation Method

The COMPASS software offers four survey calculation methods:
• Minimum Curvature
• Radius of Curvature
• Average Angle
• Balanced Tangential
Survey Calculation Method
Specified on the Company Properties dialog box, this setting is the company’s
preferred calculation method and may not be overridden in the Survey module.
V Section Origin
The default vertical section may start from either slot or from
platform center. The default vertical section origin may be
overridden in the Wellbore Setup dialog box.

Walk/Turn Rate
Two methods are available for computing walk and turn rates for
curve sections:
• MD – Turn rate = dogleg base length × change in direction /

change in measured depth (default).
• HDL – Turn rate = dogleg base length × change in direction ×

sine( (I1 + I2) / 2 ) / change measured depth; where I1 is the start
inclination, and I2 is the end inclination.
Validation
• Project – Select a project for the validation process, or select
“all” to choose all projects for this customer.
• Create Well Co-ordinates File – Click this button to report all

wells surface and bottomhole coordinates to a file in the config
directory named WellCoordinates.log. This file can be used to
validate the COMPASS database before and after any significant
data changes.
• Compute all Designs – Click this button to start the

recalculation of all wellpaths, plans, and surveys. When a value
is changed in Company Properties, the wellpath data may not be
built according to the rules in the survey program or the survey
error model. The validation process is provided to recalculate all
wellpaths by using the correct program and survey errors. In the
recalculate step, two files are created in the output directory.
These files list the surface and end-of-well coordinates before
and after reprocessing and lists any associated errors.
Using the Company Properties > Wellbore Types Tab

A wellbore type is a set of wellbore labels or type names. Each company
can have a range of different wellbore types, and each type can have a
designated color to identify wellbore groups in plots. After the wellbore
type list is created, a wellbore type can be assigned to a wellbore in the
Wellbore Properties > General tab. Wellbores may then be selected
for plots and anticollision scans based on the type.

Some examples of wellbore types include:
 Producing Well – Red

 Injection Well – Blue
 Abandoned Hole – Yellow
 Lateral Wellbore – Green
 Fish (abandoned)
 Pilot Hole
Type the name.
Click on the Color column.

Select a color from the
displayed palette.
Expand All (Company Level)

Select this command to expand all nodes in the Well Explorer below the
selected company.
Collapse All (Company Level)

Select this command to collapse all nodes in the Well Explorer below
the selected company.
Working at the Project Level

Project is the data level directly beneath Company and each project
within a company must have a unique name. Think of a project as a field
or as a group of sites. A project has one system datum (mean sea level,
lowest astronomical tide, and so on) that is used to define 0 TVD for the
project. Within the project, wellbores can be referenced to the Project
level system datum or to additional datums specified at the Well level.

Open (Project Level)

Opens the selected project.
New Site (Project Level)

To create a new site, select a project and right-click. Select New Site.
The Site Properties dialog box opens.
New Attachment (Project Level)

Use this dialog box to associate a document or picture (Word, Excel,
text file, JPG, and so on). The document can be of any type with a
recognized extension.
New Folder (Project Level)

For more information, see “New Folder (Database Level)” on page 3-8.
Copy (Project Level)

Use this command to copy the selected project from the Well Explorer
and save it to the Clipboard.
This command is disabled if nothing has been selected.
Paste (Project Level)

You must first copy (save) project data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Project Level)

hierarchy item by highlighting it, and then clicking it. Type the new

Delete (Project Level)

Use this command to remove the selected project from the database. A
confirmation box opens to ask if you are sure you want to delete the
project and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Project Level)

Use this command to export the selected project’s data in XML format,
including the hierarchical information above and any child information
associated with the project. A dialog box opens in which you supply a
directory name and file name for the XML file.
Targets (Project Level)

Use this command to access the Target Editor. A target is a point in a
geological space that is used as an aiming point or volume for directing
wellbores. Use the Target Editor to define target location and shape. The
form is also used for managing several targets on a wellbore or a site.
For more information, see “Defining Targets” on page 5-2.
Poly Lines (Project Level)

Use this editor to create or import polylines. Polylines are arbitrary lines
and shapes that can be used to represent lease lines, roads, railways,
rivers, and so on.
Surfaces (Project Level)

Use this dialog box to import a GOCAD surface or an Open Works fault
or surface grid into the EDM database; to view a surface that has already
been imported; to edit the line width, line style, and color of the surface
lines; and to delete a surface from the EDM database.

Using the Surface Manager
Surface
This section of the dialog box lists all surfaces that have been imported
into the EDM database for the project with which you are working. After
a surface has been imported, click it in this list to select it. Surface
properties for the highlighted surface are displayed on this dialog box.
You can edit the properties. This list is empty until a surface has
been imported.
Surface Properties
When you make a change to a surface property, you must click the Save
button to save the changes. Some changes, such as Colour, do not
become active until you select the surface again, or move the Level of
Detail slider.

Name
Specify or edit the name of a surface. Click Save to save the name
change to the EDM database. Consider making the name as simple and
concise as possible. When a formation top is generated using a surface,
this name is used to create the formation top name and can become quite
long. When the surface name is changed here, any existing formation
top names based on the original surface name are not updated.
Type
(Optional) Select the surface type from the pull-down list. You can click
the to input a new type by using the Surface Type Editor. This field is
optional and is used for information only. You cannot filter the surfaces.
Line Appearance
Use the Width, Style, and Colour fields to edit the appearance of
the surface.
Level of Detail
Use this slider bar to increase or decrease the number of data points used
to draw the surface on this dialog box. When the slider is moved toward
Max, more data points are used to draw the surface, and the surface will
have more detail. The level of detail impacts the display of the surface
only on this dialog box and does not change the way the surface is
displayed on a plot.
Save
Click Save to save any changes you made to the surface. The surface is
saved to the EDM database.
Delete
Click Delete to delete the surface that is highlighted in the Surface list
(at the top of this dialog box). The surface is deleted from the EDM
database.

Import
Click Import to import a surface using the Surface Import Wizard.

Multi-Design Export (Project Level)

Use this dialog box to export multiple design wellpaths within
the project.

Properties (Project Level)

This command allows you to view or edit project properties. The Project
Properties tabs are used to create a new project and to provide
information regarding creation and modification of the project.
Using the Project Properties > General Tab
System Datum
Define the common vertical reference for all depth measurements in this
project. Select a name from the list or type a new name. Examples are
Mean Sea Level, Lowest Astronomic Tide, and Indian Springs Low.
Elevation__ft above Mean Sea Level

Enter the elevation above mean sea level for the system datum you
selected. Enter a negative value if the elevation is below mean sea level.
Use Well Reference Point

When this check box is selected, you can enter a well reference point in
the Well Properties dialog box. A well reference point is a permanent,
recoverable, fixed point in the well and may be used as the tie-in point
for the first survey and plan on this well.
Default Magnetic Model

Use the pull-down list to select a default magnetic model.
Using the Project Properties > Map Info Tab
Geographic Reference System

You must select the correct geodetic system before computing grid
convergence or performing geodetic conversions (latitude and longitude
to easting and northing, and vice versa).

Three choices need to be made:
• Geodetic System is the general mapping system (for example,

Universal Transverse Mercator). You can use the pull-down list to
change the project’s geodetic system. Doing so converts all map
and global coordinates from the old system to the new system using
one of two options:
— Convert and preserve map coordinates

— Convert and preserve latitude and longitude
The COMPASS software prompts you for the conversion
method, which converts data that is stored in the database in
addition to the onscreen data.
• Geodetic Datum is the datum defines the center and radii of the
projection in this location (for example, ED50).
• Map Zone is the zone within the system (for example, UTM Zone
31, North 0 to 6 E).
For more information, see the online help.
Local Coordinate System

The local coordinate origin is the zero point for north and east
coordinates. The choices are as follows:
• Originates From Well Center – The convention is to use the

rig-floor center position of the current well as the common
reference for all wells relative to it.

• Originates From Site Center – This convention uses a common

point in the template or installation as a common reference.
• Originates From Project Center Based On Site – This

convention is to use a single point within (or without) the project as
a common reference for all wells. In the COMPASS software, you
must create a single site as the center for the project coordinates.
Project Centered Coordinate Systems
Because each site has a different convergence angle, if you choose a Project
Centered coordinate system, local north must be based on the map Grid.
Use Geodetic Scale Factor (local coordinates are

true distances)
When converting from distances on a map to distances measured on the
ground, a small difference is caused by the curvature in the earth. A map
system is designed to minimize this distortion. In a Universal Transverse
Mercator system, the difference is 4 m over a 10,000 m east/west
traverse at the central meridian. Without this option, land distances may
be converted directly to map distances (provided meters to feet and true
north convergence rotations are calculated). With this option, a scale
factor is applied. The value for a location may be seen in the
Geodetic Calculator.

Expand All (Project Level)

selected project.
Collapse All (Project Level)

the selected project.
Working at the Site Level

A site is a collection of one or more wells referenced from a local
coordinate system centered on the site location. A site can be a single
land well, an offshore subsea well, a group of wells drilled from an
onshore pad, or a group of wells drilled from an offshore platform
or template.
Open (Site Level)

Open the current site.
New Well (Site Level)

To create a new well, select a site, right-click, and then select New Well.
The Well Properties dialog box opens. If you want to lock the data and
prevent changes to the well data and all levels below it, set the Locked
Data password in the Company Properties dialog box. Select Well is
locked: in the Well Properties dialog box after setting the password and
click OK.
For information about the fields and controls on the Well Properties
dialog box, see “Properties (Well Level)” on page 3-59.
New Attachment (Site Level)

recognized extension. For more information, see “New Attachment
(Company Level)” on page 3-15.

New Folder (Site Level)

Copy (Site Level)

Use this command to copy the selected site from the Well Explorer and
save it to the Clipboard.
Paste (Site Level)

You must first copy (save) site data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Site Level)

hierarchy item by highlighting it and then clicking it. Type the new
Delete (Site Level)

Use this command to remove the selected site from the database. A
confirmation box will open, asking if you are sure you want to delete the
site and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Site Level)

Use this command to export the selected site’s data in XML format,
associated with the site. A dialog box opens, in which you supply a
directory and file name for the XML file.
Unlock All (Site Level))

Use this option to unlock all data associated with this site.

Templates (Site Level)

Use this command to access the Template Editor. A template is an array
of slot coordinates that define the surface/subsea location of wells. The
Site Template Editor is a coordinate generator that provides an easy way
to define slot template geometries. When you define a template, you can
enter single slot coordinates, or, if the template has a rectangular or
circular slot layout, the COMPASS software can automatically calculate
the local slot coordinates for you.
A site can have more than one template defined for it—for example, a
collection of subsea wells or a platform that has had additional slots
attached to it.
Template Editor
When creating a well, you do not have to use the Site Template Editor
to define the well location. You can type in the local coordinates
directly. However, if slots are defined, you can select a start slot and
assume the calculated local coordinates of that slot.
The Template Editor uses two resizeable panes located in the same
window: an Editor and a View. The relative sizes of each may be
adjusted by moving the separator bar. The Editor enables you to define
templates. The View graphically portrays the template currently
selected, and provides the usual COMPASS live graphics tools.The
following graphic depicts the Slot Template Editor and View:
The Template Editor consists of two panels:
• The left panel is the Editor Panel and is used to enter name and
numeric data. The Editor Panel has two tabs, including the Slots tab
and the Geometry tab.
• The right panel is the Template View. It can be used to select

templates and individual slots. The currently selected slot is
highlighted in red. The other slots are shown in green.

The editor panel may be toggled between viewing the entered template
patterns or a list of each individual slot generated by all the patterns.
View/Select Templates Here
Define template properties here.
The COMPASS software supports three types of Templates:
Template Type Definition
Rectangular Row by Column slot spacing
Circular Radial slot spacing
Single One slot, such as subsea well or onshore

drilling pad
You can convert regular-shaped rectangular and circular templates to

single slot templates if required.
Note
This conversion is not reversible.

For each type of template, you must enter a short name, a long name, and
the location of slot reference from the site center. If Site is a platform,
coordinates are normally 0 NS, 0 EW. In the preceding example, the
Echo template has a short name E so that each slot is numbered E1, E2,
E3, and so on. You define the template geometry, then add it by clicking
the Add icon in the toolbar, modify it by clicking the Save icon, or delete
it by clicking the Delete icon. Existing templates may be selected from
the pick-list on the Geometry tab or selected by using the mouse within
the View. Active templates are highlighted in red within the View.
After generating one or more templates, use the View Slots tab available
near the bottom left of the editor to display the local coordinates of all
slots in the site. You cannot edit slots or templates with the View Slots
toggle set; you must toggle back to the Geometry tab. The View Slots
tab does enable a group of single slot templates to be rotated by a given
angle about a rotation point. This feature is useful when a rectangular or
circular template had not been used to define slot spacings, but the slots
needed to be rotated.
Curved Conductors
If curved conductors are defined in Well Setup, you will see additional blue slots
in the View to indicate a different location of Well Reference Point relative to
Slot (red).
Rectangular Template
Start Number
Start numbering slots from this number. For example, if your site has
two templates, each with nine slots, you may want to start numbering the
first template from 1 and the second from 10.

Numbering
Slot numbers can be ordered by row or column, as shown below.
The following graphic depicts Rectangular Template Slot Numbering:
Slot Geometry
Rectangular templates are defined with a number of spaced rows and
columns with their own regular spacing. In the preceding example, there
are three rows and five columns; row spacing is 7.5 ft and column
spacing is 7.5 ft.

The top left slot is used to determine the location of the Template
Center. The location of the top left slot is entered as X and Y offsets
from the template center without considering rotation. The Y distance to
the top left slot is 2 m, and the X distance is -4 m.
With the template short name as “R” and a rotation angle set to
45 degrees, your final template appears as above.
Circular Template
Start number
Start numbering slots from this number. For example, if your site has
two templates and each has 16 slots, you may want to start numbering
the first template from 1 and the second from 17.
With Numbering Clockwise

Slot numbers can be ordered clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Radius to first slot

Enter the radius of the circular template.
Number of slots
Enter the number of slots on the template. These are evenly distributed
about the circle, starting at the angle to the first slot.
Angle to first slot

The direction from local north to the first slot.
The following graphic depicts Circular Template Geometry:
This template example has eight slots. The template short name is C.
The start number is 1, numbered clockwise. The radius is 4 m, and the
angle to the first slot is 22.5 degrees.
Poly Lines (Site Level)

rivers, and so on.

Multi-Design Export (Site Level)

Use this dialog box to export multiple design wellpaths within the site.
Properties (Site Level)

Select this command to view or edit site properties. The Site Properties
dialog box opens.
Using the Site Properties > General Tab

The Site Properties dialog box is used to create a new site and to provide
information regarding creation and modification of the site:
Enter the numeric value for

the default site elevation.
This is the security designation for

this site, based on the current user’s
access rights. UNRESTRICTED is
the default. Be careful—if you restrict
this field, certain users will not be
able to view this site. Tight groups
are created in the EDM Administration Utility
through the EDM Security plug-in. They are
assigned in the Well Explorer at the Site or
Well level.

Using the Site Properties > Location Tab
Center Location
The COMPASS software uses the Map Coordinates values to compute
the distance between two sites during field level anticollision. You can
enter map coordinates directly or convert them from latitude
and longitude.
Choice Description
None If selected, anticollision between sites

is disabled.
Map Coordinates The map coordinates of your location based

on the geodetic system selected in the Project
Properties dialog box. These are essential if
you compute project level anticollision. The
map coordinate units are set in the
Unit System.
Geographic Coordinates The geodetic coordinates of your location

based on the geodetic datum selected in
Project Properties. To enter geographic
coordinates, you must first select a geodetic
system in Project Properties.
Lease Lines Enter a distance from one corner of the lease.

Positive numbers are interpreted as from the
south and west lines. Negative numbers are
interpreted as from the north and east lines.

The following graphic depicts Lease Line coordinates. Two site centers
are indicated—one as a distance from a West and North line, another
from an East and South line:
Anticollision Requires Map Coordinates
The COMPASS software does not use lease line coordinates to compute
anticollision between two sites. Anticollision requires map coordinates.
Location Uncertainty
Radius of Uncertainty
This is the accuracy to which the site has been positioned or
uncertainty of the local coordinate origin relative to map or
geodetic coordinates.
For example, a floating drilling rig may be positioned with accuracy

of 1-2 m and due to wind and wave movement oscillates around the
mean position. When spudding an exploration well, this uncertainty
should be included, because it will be used during anticollision
calculations between wells drilled from different sites.
If drilling over a subsea template, you should include the position

uncertainty of the template, not that of the vessel. The unit class is

Distance and uses the same units as your local coordinate system,
not the Map Units.
The COMPASS Software Uses the ISCWSA Survey Error Framework
The COMPASS software now uses the ISCWSA survey error framework for
calculating all survey errors and requires that all instrument and location error
input is to 1 sigma confidence. This means that the site and well location errors
are now 0.5 the value entered in previous versions of the COMPASS software
where the Company error model was Systematic or Cone of Error. The only
exception is that the COMPASS software allows survey instrument errors to be
entered in the Systematic or Cone of Error formats as before.
Slot Radius
This is the radius of the slots in the template view. This field may
also be used as the radius of the drill bit for the first hole section. For
cone of error models, this radius is added to all errors calculated for
the wellbores included in this site (for example, a drill bit of 26 in.
diameter has a radius of 1.1 ft).
Azimuth Reference
North Reference
You may align the site’s local coordinate system to either True or
Grid north. Depending upon your selection, the north axis of all the
sites in the project will be aligned to either true or grid north and all
surveys should be corrected accordingly. In a True North system, the
azimuths and coordinates will be rotated by the convergence angle
from the grid lines on the map. For more information, see “True,
Grid, and Magnetic North” on page 10-35.
Convergence Angle
This noneditable field is the difference between grid north and true
north. This angle correction is only applied in the opposite sense to
azimuths when using a Grid North reference. Convergence is used
when computing anticollision between sites when using a True
North coordinate system.

Expand All (Site Level)

selected site.
Collapse All (Site Level)

the selected site.
Working at the Well Level

A well is simply a surface location, referenced from the site local
coordinate system. A well can be located at the site center or offset some
distance N/S - E/W from the site center. If a geodetic system is
configured for the project, equivalent map coordinates are calculated
automatically. If a template has been created for the site, a well can be
assigned to a slot in that template. In the latter case, the well location
assumes that of the slot. For Land wells, a site and a well are often the
same thing. So, local coordinates from the site for the well are set to
0 N/S, 0 E/W, with the names being identical.
A well can have one or more wellbores assigned to it. For example, the
original wellbore, with one or more sidetracks tied on to it at different
kick-off depths. In the COMPASS software, any wellpath trajectory can
be traced directly from its TD back to the well surface location.
Open (Well Level)

Opens the selected well.
New Wellbore (Well Level)

To create a new wellbore, select a well and click New Wellbore. The
Wellbore Properties dialog box opens.
New Attachment (Well Level)

recognized extension. For more information, see “New Attachment
(Company Level)” on page 3-15.

New Folder (Well Level)

Copy (Well Level)

Use this command to copy the selected well from the Well Explorer and
save it to the Clipboard.
Paste (Well Level)

You must copy (save) well data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Well Level)

hierarchy item by highlighting it and clicking it. Type the new name in
the box that appears around the current name.
Delete (Well Level)

Use this command to remove the selected well from the database. A
confirmation box opens to ask if you are sure you want to delete the well
and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Well Level)

Use this command to export the selected well’s data in XML format,
associated with the well. A dialog box opens in which you supply a
directory and file name for the XML file.
Multi-Design Export (Well Level)

Use this dialog box to export multiple design wellpaths within the site.

WITSML (Well Level)

Select this option to selectively transfer business objects from another
application into the EDM database using an SML transfer file, or export
business objects (that is, Wells, Wellbores, Targets, and Surveys) from
the current application to a WITSML transfer file (XML).
Poly Lines (Well Level)

rivers, and so on.
Properties (Well Level)

Select this command to view or edit well properties. The Well Properties
dialog box is used to create a new well and to provide information
regarding creation and modification of the well. A well in the
COMPASS software is a surface hole or wellhead through which a
number of wellbores are drilled. The Well Properties dialog box is used
to enter the well’s offset location from the site, plus naming information.
Under each well, you may define several Wellbores.

Using the Well Properties > General Tab
This is the default display unit system for the well. When a well
is opened (or one of its wellbores or designs), the display unit
system automatically changes to the well display unit system.
Note
If the Well is locked check box is selected, you cannot edit any of the fields.

Using the Well Properties > Depth Reference Tab

Use the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab to define depth
reference datums relative to the system datum specified on the
Project Properties > General tab.
The label indicates the Type, edit, or view the elevation above the System
system datum. Datum (this must be a positive number). If you
have a design associated with this datum, you
cannot edit this field.
Use the grid to view, edit, or add a

new datum. Select the Default
check box to indicate which datum is
the datum to be used for all designs
created for this well.
See the online help for

details on specifying
configuration.
The summary area depicts the

selected configuration.
For more information about datums, see “Using Datums in EDM™” on

page 2-21.

Using the Well Properties > Well Ref Pt Tab

The WRP is a permanent, recoverable, fixed point in the well. This point
is usually at the well’s position at seabed for offshore installations or at
ground level for land installations. This location will be used as the tie-in
point for the first survey and plan on this well. This tab appears when the
vertical system in the Project Properties has been set to well reference
point (WRP).
Vertical Distance Above/Below System

Enter the vertical distance of the point above or below the system datum.
For offshore installations, the distance is positive below mean sea level.
For land installations, the distance is positive above mean sea level.
Non Vertical (curved conductor/slant rig)

If the rig is vertically positioned above the wellhead, you only need to
enter the vertical distance above/below system. If the rig is offset from
the wellhead for various reasons, you need to enter the information
below to define the offset location of the well reference point.
Additional Measured Depth at WRP

If the wellbore is nonvertical at the WRP, then the along hole distance
from rig datum to WRP is longer than the vertical distance. In this case,
enter the additional measured depth, which is usually less than 1 m for
curved conductors. This additional distance will not change if the rig
elevation changes.

Offset from Wellhead North/East

Enter the horizontal distance from the wellhead (on fixed installation) to
the WRP on the seabed/ground.
Inclination and Azimuth

Enter the wellbore inclination and direction at WRP if it is nonvertical.
Azimuth is to the north reference (True or Grid) chosen in
Site Properties.
Using the Well Properties > Location Tab
Several methods are available for defining a wellhead location relative

to the site:
Slot
Select a slot from the list you have defined in the Template Editor. If this
slot is subsequently moved in the Template Editor, the wellhead and all
data moves accordingly.
Offset from Site

Enter the offset distance, N/S and E/W from site center to this wellhead.

Map
The wellhead position may be defined in map coordinates. Enter the
Easting or Northing of the wellhead, and the local coordinates are
calculated from the site center. The well location is stored relative to the
site, so if the site moves, the well moves too.
Geographic
Select this option, and enter latitude and longitude coordinates to
indicate the location of the wellhead.
Well Position Error

A position error may be associated with the well location. This error is
added to all errors generated on Wellbores in this well. Be careful not to
confuse this error with site position error. The well error is designed for
special cases, such as when a number of wellheads are in close
proximity to each other (grouped in the same site) but not connected by
a template. The well error in this case is the error in measurement of one
well relative to the others, but not the error in the group’s location,
which is the site position error. Well error should be left as zero for
template wells.
Convergence
This noneditable field is the difference between grid north and true
north. This angle correction is only applied in the opposite sense to
azimuths when using a Grid North reference. Convergence is used when
computing anticollision between sites when using a True North
coordinate system.
Expand All (Well Level)

selected well.
Collapse All (Well Level)

the selected project.

Working at the Wellbore Level

A wellbore is a borehole, which is one or more contiguous sections of
wellbore traceable up to the surface location. It could be an original well
drilled from the surface or a sidetrack kicked off from a known depth
from a parent wellpath. If a well has an original hole and two sidetracks
drilled from it, that well has three wellbores defined in the
COMPASS software.
When using the COMPASS software, only one active wellpath name
appears in the Status window. The Wellbore category allows you to file
multiple surveys and plans in their respective boreholes. When opening
surveys or plans, you are only shown names of items in the
current wellpath.
A wellbore describes the path of a well that may be a planned (or

unplanned) sidetrack or a lateral in a multilateral completion. The
original hole must also be represented as a wellbore. In this dialog box,
the wellbore name and sidetrack information must be defined. In
addition, a wellbore may be drilled from a different rig datum elevation.
Open (Wellbore Level)

Opens the selected wellbore.
New Plan (Wellbore Level)

Use this command to access the Plan Properties dialog box to define the
plan name, contractor, survey tool, and tie-on information for this
directional survey. For more information, see “Using the Plan Editor” on
page 5-15.
New Actual Design (Wellbore Level)

To create a new actual design, select a wellbore, right-click, and then
select New Actual Design. For more information, see the online help.
New Survey (Wellbore Level)

Use this dialog box to define the survey (or plan) name, contractor,
survey tool and tie-on information for this directional survey. To access
the dialog box, select a wellbore, right-click, and then select New
Survey. For more information, see the online help.

New Attachment (Wellbore Level)

Use this dialog box to associate a document, picture (Word, Excel, text
file, JPG, and so on), or folder with a node in the Well Explorer. To
create a new attachment, select a wellbore, right click, and then select
New Attachment.
New Folder (Wellbore Level)

Copy (Wellbore Level)

Use this option to copy all the information at the wellbore level and
below the wellbore level.
Paste (Wellbore Level)

Use this option to paste the copied wellbore information to the Well
Level node in the Well Explorer.
Rename (Wellbore Level)

Use this option to change the name of the currently selected wellbore.
Delete (Wellbore Level)

Use this option to delete all the information for the currently
selected wellbore.
Export (Wellbore Level)

Use this dialog box to export all the wellbore and its sub-branch
information to a transfer file.
Import DIMS Surveys (Wellbore Level)

Use this dialog box to import a set of survey data from the DFW
system database.

WITSML (Well Level)

Select this option to selectively transfer business objects from another
application into the EDM database using an SML transfer file or export
business objects (that is, Wells, Wellbores, Targets, and Surveys) from
the current application to a WITSML transfer file (XML).
Targets (Wellbore Level)

Use this command to access the Target Editor. A target is a point in a
geological space that is used as an aiming point or volume for directing
wellbores. Use the Target Editor to define target location and shape. The
form is also used for managing several targets on a wellbore or a site.
Properties (Wellbore Level)

Selecting this command allows you to view or edit wellbore properties.
The Wellbore Properties dialog box opens. The Wellbore Properties
dialog box is used to create a new wellbore and to provide information
for creation and modification of the wellbore.
Working at the Design Level

Design is the data level directly beneath the Wellbore level. Each design
within a wellbore must have a unique name.
A design can be thought of as a design phase. Associated with each

design are a pore pressure group, a fracture pressure group, a
temperature gradient, and a wellpath. A design may have several cases
associated with it, but each case will use the same pore pressure group,
fracture pressure group, geothermal gradient, and wellpath.
Note
If the design is locked, you can open it in Read-only mode, but you cannot save it
back to the database. You can use Save As to save it to another design for editing,
or export it to a .XML file. Pore pressure, fracture gradient, geothermal gradient,
and wellpath data associated with a locked design is also locked. (An asterisk placed
after the design name in the application title bar indicates there are unsaved changes
to the open design.)

A design can be categorized as prototype, planned, or actual. The design

icon indicates the category, as shown below:
Icon Type of Design
Prototype (No line down the middle of the casing, and the blue circle
is white inside.)
Planned (Yellow line down the middle of the casing, and the blue
circle has red inside.)
Actual (Red line down the middle of the casing, and no blue outline
for the circle.)
You may have several different versions of prototype designs. For

example, assume the geologist wants to analyze two different formation
fracture gradients. This analysis can easily be accomplished by having
two prototype designs that are identical except for the fracture gradient
group. The StressCheck™, CasingSeat™, and COMPASS applications
routinely use designs.
The datum in which the data is viewed and calculated is set at the
Well level.
Open (Design Level)

Opens the selected design.
View/Edit (Design Level)

For an actual plan, this option is View. For prototype plan and principal
plan, this option is Edit. The View option allows you to view the existing
actual wellpath data. The Edit option allows you to work on the
Wellplan Editor. For more information, see the online help.
New Survey (Design Level)

For more information, see “New Survey (Wellbore Level)” on page 3-
65.
Copy (Design Level)

Use this option to copy all the information at the Design level.

Paste (Design Level)

Use this option to paste the copied design level information to the
Wellbore level node in the Well Explorer.
Rename (Design Level)

Use this option to change the name of the currently selected design.
Delete (Design Level)

Use this option to delete all the information from the currently
selected design.
Export (Design Level)

Use this dialog box to export a design level transfer file (*. edm.xml),
export a set of survey data; or export to a data exchange file (*.dxd).
Import (Design Level)

Used this dialog box to import a data exchange file (*.dxd), or import a
set of survey data from a DFW system database.
Casing (Design Level)

Use this dialog box to input the casing string information in the Design
Casing Editor.
Formations (Design Level)

Use this dialog box to work on the Design Formation Top Editor and
input the formation-related information.
Reports (Design Level)

Use this command to output the Survey and Summary report.


Chapter 4
Concepts
Overview
In this chapter, you will be introduced to basic COMPASS™ software

features, including:
• accessing online documentation and tools
• using the Status window and Data Viewer
• recognizing locked data items
• using the menu bar
• using the toolbar
• using the status bar
• accessing online help
• configuring units

Chapter 4: Concepts
Accessing Online Documentation
The COMPASS software is installed with online documentation to

assist you with using the product. This documentation can be found by
using the Start menu. The default installation creates a program group
titled Landmark® Engineer’s Desktop™ software 5000.1. From here,
you can select the software you want to use, the Documentation
subgroup, or the Tools subgroup.
Using the Documentation subgroup, you may select:
• Help – This selection provides access to the online help for all the
EDM™ applications. The online help is also accessible from all
windows and dialog boxes in the software.
• Release Notes – This selection provides access to the release notes

for all the EDM applications. Release notes provide useful
information about the current release, including new features, bug
fixes, known problems, and how to get support when you need it.
• User Guides – This selection provides access to the EDM Common

Installation Guide and the Data Migration Tool Kit user guides.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Using the Main Window
The COMPASS software is a Microsoft® Windows® MDI (Multiple

Document Interface) application. Data entry and analysis are performed
in separate windows that you view simultaneously within a central
application area. The COMPASS software itself is composed of the
distinct tool areas shown below.
Menu Bar Well Explorer

Toolbar
Viewing Preferences
Recent Bar
Filter Bar
Change History
indicated by
color change
Datums
Reference
Status Bar
MDI Document Area. Will display any

number of screens simultaneously.
Using the Well Explorer

The Well Explorer is a combined browser and status window for
navigating, managing, and launching COMPASS data.
The Status View browser is divided into three sections, and a pull-down
Recent Selections list. The section located on the left of the window is
the Status window. The top right section of the window is the Browser
window, and the bottom right section of the window is the Data Viewer.
The Status View browser is always available. You can minimize it, but
you cannot close it.

Chapter 4: Concepts
These are the essential components of Well Explorer:

Recent Bar
Filter Bar
Browser
Window
Status Window
Associated
Data Viewer
Status Window
The Status window displays the following information:
• the currently open data set including the company, project, site,
well, wellbore, and design
• status box stating which company, project, site, well, wellbore, or

design is open
• drawing of vertical datum reference with elevation information for

the open wellbore
• drawing of the slot position with north arrow for coordinate

information for the open well
• vertical section origin and angle
• Browser window (data tree)

Chapter 4: Concepts
Viewing Preferences
Use the viewing preferences to configure many of the items shown on
the Status window.
Select the unit system you Select the TVDs to System check box
want to use from the if you want true vertical depths (TVD)
pull-down list. The COMPASS referenced to the system datum. If the
software has two default unit check box is not selected, TVD is
systems—API and SI—but Select Grid or True
displayed relative to the datum to specify what you
you can make your own selected in the Datum pull-down list.
system. For more information, want to use for the
Measured depths are always relative North reference.
see “Configuring Units” on to the pull-down list.
page 4-12.
Select the datum you want to use Select the coordinate system
from the pull-down list. Specify you want to use.
datums by selecting File >
Properties > Well > Properties.
Browser Window
The Browser window is located in the upper right section of the
Well Explorer.
You can use the browser to search for the main COMPASS data items
like Companies, Projects, Sites, Wells, Wellbores, Surveys, and Plans.
The currently open context is shown in bold.
The browser operates like the Windows Explorer and operates over the
COMPASS data hierarchy in a similar fashion to a directory tree. For
more detailed information, search on Well Explorer in the online help.
• Right-click to access a context-sensitive menu. Depending on the

hierarchical level you have highlighted (Company, Project, Site,
Well, or Wellbore), the menu populates with all of the relevant
options from the main menu (such as New, Open, Edit, Delete,
Export, Import, Report, and so on).
• To use the Browser window to select additional plans and surveys

for graphs, select the check boxes associated with the item you
want to include on the graph.
• You can use the browser to drag-and-drop data between

hierarchical levels. For example, you can select a project associated
with one company and copy it to another company.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Locked Data Items

Both the Status and Browser areas in the Status window indicate
whether data at a particular level has been locked by displaying padlock
or key icons adjacent to the data. Companies, projects, sites, wells,
wellbores, and designs can be locked, as well as individual plans and
surveys. Locking prevents data from being mistakenly modified
or deleted.
The following graphic depicts Status window locked data icons

or padlocks:
A padlock indicates a
locked item.
Concurrency Control
In a multi-user database, different users can use the COMPASS software
at the same time to access the same data source. In this environment, it
is useful to know if another user is currently using a data set. The
Browser window indicates when someone is using a design by placing
a SAM icon ( ) next to the design name in the list so that users know
when someone else is accessing it.
Interpreting the SAM Color

If SAM is red, one or more users have the design open, and you are
restricted to accessing the design in Read-only mode.
If SAM is blue, one or more users have the design open, but you still
have full read/write access to the design.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Data Viewer
The Data Viewer is located in the bottom portion of the right side of the
Status View browser. It displays information about data belonging to the
current open item (in the Browser window), such as templates, targets,
tool codes, casings, formations datum, and annotations.
Recent Bar or Recent Selections List

Recent Selections lists recently opened items. The COMPASS software
always opens the last selection, but you may use this list to open
companies, projects, sites, wells, wellbores, and designs that were
edited previously.
Filter Bar
The Filter bar lists previously defined searches and allows you to create
new ones. Searches can be created with any number and combination
of parameters.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Using the Menu Bar

The menu bar provides access to all tools available within the software.
It is organized as follows:
Select... To...
File Open data, create new items, import/export functions, exchange

data between different Landmark applications.
Composer When the Wall Plot Composer is active, use this menu to access
many Wall Plot Composer options.
View Launch certain graphs and Legend, Launch Wallplot Composer.
Planning Access the Directional Well Planning module.
Survey Access the Survey module.
Anti-collision Access the Anticollision module.
Tools Launch utility functions, configure default graph and

report settings.
Windows Change full size windows. This is a standard Windows

menu item.
Help Access the online help, and view current version info.
You can select any item within the menus by using the mouse or the
indicated keyboard quick keys.
To use the quick keys to select an item, press Alt and the underlined
character. For example, to import a transfer file from another
COMPASS site using the File Import Transfer File menu item,
press Alt-F-M-T.
The Survey, Planning, and Anti-collision menus are license-driven

through either a dongle, network licensing, or FLEXlm file-based
licensing. If the COMPASS software is unable to locate a license for
these products, the menus are still active, but a message box appears
informing you of the license restriction. This event may also occur for
network-licensed sites when all available licenses are checked out by
other users. You also find that menus are inactive (grayed out) if a
wellpath is not currently open.
The Survey and Planning modules are mutually exclusive. If a Survey is

open, you cannot access the Planning menu and vice-versa.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Using Toolbars
The toolbar is located below the menu bar and enables quick access to
commonly used functions within the COMPASS software. Intuitive
icons indicate which functionality is accessed by each icon. Descriptive
tool tips appear if you pause your cursor over any icon.
Company Select
Properties Offset Wells
Link to Find
Project Plan
Casing Editor
Properties View OpenWorks®
Site Design Software
Wallplot
Properties Properties Composer
Well
Geodetic
Properties
Calculator
Graph Setup
Formation Section
Editor View
Wellbore
Properties 3D View
Templates Reports
Targets Magnetic
Survey Calculator
Tools Data
Dictionary
For more information, see the COMPASS online help.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Using Status Bar
The status bar is the information area at the bottom of the COMPASS
window that displays SAM rights, Help, and Units information.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Accessing the Online Help
The online Help system is remarkably comprehensive and is geared

towards engineering descriptions and solutions. Much of the help has
been written after reviewing frequently asked questions from clients
stored in the Landmark Call Tracking System. See the “Frequently
Asked Questions” section in the online help for details.
Access context-sensitive online help as follows:
• From the COMPASS main menu, select Help > Contents.

• Click Help (located on most dialog boxes or editors).
• Press F1.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Configuring Units
The COMPASS Units Management System (UMS) is accessible from

the Tools menu. The essential function of the units editor is to configure
display units for each unit class and organize them into unit sets. Display
units are distinct from storage units. At any time, you may change the
display units used by the COMPASS software and automatically
convert any values with no adverse affects to the data or results. This
also means that you can share data with other users or clients who use a
different unit set; they automatically see your data in their units.
For applications in the WELLPLAN™ and COMPASS software, only

some units are meaningful for expressing unit types. For this reason,
Unit Classes (sets of units for a particular unit type) are defined.
Examples of Unit Classes are:
• Diameters: [mm], [inch], [cm]

• Depth: [m], [ft]
• Dogleg Severity: [deg/100ft], [deg/30m], [deg/100m], [deg/10m],
[rad/30m], [rad/10m]
The following graphic depicts the COMPASS Units Editor.
Select the unit system you want to use

from the pull-down list.
Each tab indicates a

separate unit system.
Two unit systems—API
and SI—are default unit
systems distributed with
the COMPASS
software.
Click New to
create a new
unit system.
You can base
the system on
an existing
system.

Chapter 4: Concepts
Each data entry field in the COMPASS software belongs to a Unit Class,
and its value is displayed in the unit that is defined for that class.
Variables that belong to different classes do not need to be represented
in the same type of units. For example, while Hole Diameter might be
represented in inches (API), Hole Depth might be represented in
meters (SI).
You use the Unit Systems Editor to configure a Display unit for each
Unit Class. These unit specifications can be saved so that each time you
use the COMPASS software, data appears in the desired units.
The COMPASS software is shipped with two default unit sets (API and
SI) that cannot be edited. They are provided as a starting point for any
customized unit set that could consist of a combination of API and SI
units. Additionally, a default set of units is provided within a given class.
You cannot add units to a particular class.
Oil companies typically create a unit set for their own employees.
Contractors may create unit sets for each of their clients that receive
WELLPLAN or COMPASS reports or graphs.

Chapter 4: Concepts

Chapter 5
Planning Module
Overview
The Plan Editor is a mathematical toolbox consisting of a large number

of directional well planning solutions. Solutions are available for a wide
range of planning problems from simple two-dimensional slant and 
S-shaped wells to complex three-dimensional wells up to and beyond
the horizontal, threaded through any number of targets. Integration with
other Landmark® software enables directional well plans to be quickly
evaluated for engineering constraints.
Active plans can be combined with the Anticollision module and the
Target Editor to provide a powerful decision-making aid. The basic
components of the Plan Editor are:
• Plan Setup
• Planned Survey Tool Program
• Plan Editor Grid
• 2D and 3D Planning Methods
• Project Ahead
• Planned Walk Rates
• Wellpath Optimiser
• Planning Reports
• Plan Export

Chapter 5: Planning Module
Defining Targets
Using Targets
To use targets in well planning, the planner must have the location and
geometry of any drilling and geological targets defined within the
Target Editor. These targets must be assigned to the current wellpath
before they can be used. Most of the planning methods enable you to
select a target to which to plan. By default, the planning methods
designs to the aiming point of the target, though an Adjust button is
usually available that allows you to manually move the aiming point. If
a target is not defined, the well planner can usually enter the location as
a point in space: TVD, Northing and Easting from the local
coordinate origin.
Plans designs that are designed to target locations remain linked to those
targets. If a target location is changed, all linked plans are updated
automatically. Therefore, the plan editor and target editors can be used
concurrently while directional well planning.
In the COMPASS™ software, a target is a subsurface location (TVD, N,

or E) with an assigned geometry and orientation that may be used for
planning or wellpath monitoring.
After they are created, targets can be used by the Survey and Planning
modules, can appear on most of the available graphics, and can be
referenced in planning and survey reports.
Target Geometry
Each target can have a shape defined about its location. A target can be
geometric (either a point, rectangle, circle, or ellipse) or nongeometric
(defined as a polygon with any number of points).

The following graphic depicts geometric and polygonal targets:
Each target has an aiming point, which is the location that the Plan
Editor methods aim toward. For geometric targets, the aiming point
defaults to the geometric center. However, this aiming point can be
offset laterally and vertically from the geometric center by using X and
Y offsets and thickness up and down. Thickness enables a planar depth
to be assigned to the geometrical target. Polygonal targets can have
variable thicknesses defined, which enables wedge or drillers cones to
be modeled. All targets can be rotated about the aiming point and
inclined from the horizontal along any azimuth; this enables a target to
model geologic dip and strike.
Target geometry is discussed in more detail later in this chapter.
Accessing the Target Editor

Several ways to access the Target Editor include:
• selecting File > Properties > Project > Targets.
• selecting a project or wellbore in the Well Explorer, and then

double-click the target entry in the Data Viewer.
• Click the icon on the toolbar.

Using the Target Editor
Select the check box associated

with a target to indicate the
target is a Wellbore target.
Click the Project icon to Click the Wellbore icon
view all targets for Target Viewer.
to view only the
the project. wellbore targets.
Local coordinates are from the local coordinate origin.
In the Target Properties section, you Map coordinates are based on the grid system specified by
can specify the location, shape, selecting File > Properties > Project > Properties > Map Info.
size, and orientation of the target. Polar coordinates are a distance and azimuth from the
local center.

Defining the Target Geometry

Use the Geometry tab to enter information on the target’s shape. A target
can be a simple point location, a radius about an aiming point, a box or
rectangular shape to define lateral tolerance, an ellipse, or a complicated
polygonal target with any kind of irregular geometry.
The Geometry tab in the Target Editor is used to define the shape for the
selected target or for a new target. When you select a shape on this tab,
appropriate entry fields are enabled so that you can define the shape
in detail.
Target shapes can be one of a number of pre-defined shapes, including:
• Circle – circle, semicircle, or pie slice

• Ellipse – ellipse or a semi-ellipse
• Rectangle – square or rectangle
• Polygon – user-defined shape
Circular Targets
The following graphic depicts the Circular Target Editor window:
Select the desired

target shape.
Offset from Target Centre fields Type a value in
enable 3D target geometry and the Up and Down
orientation to be defined. You fields to change a
can offset the geometric center circular target to
of the target from the plan-to a cylindrical
point by entering X (local East) target. The top of
and Y (local North) offset. the target is Up,
the distance
above the plan-to
point. The bottom
Start and End Angles enables of the target is
“pie-shapes” to be defined for Down, the
circular and elliptical targets. distance below
For a full circle shape, use zero the plan-to point.
for the start and end angles.
Dip angle is the angle you want to be on at the target. This is 90°
minus the inclination of the target. This is the direction a ball
would roll if placed in the formation bedding plane.
This window enables you to enter a circular target or, by giving the
circle height and a dip angle, define a cylinder.

Elliptical Targets
The following graphic depicts the Elliptical Target Editor window.
For Semi-Minor,
Rotation angle enables the
enter the
target to be turned relative to
dimension of the
Site North. Target rotation is
ellipse along the
about the aiming point.
local North/South
axis. For
Semi-Major,
enter the Thickness Up and Down
dimension of the enable the aiming point to be
ellipse along the offset vertically within
local East/West the target.
axis.
Formation Plane parameters
enable geologic dip and down
dip direction to be specified;
for example, to model a
bedding plane. This may be
different from target rotation.
Rectangular Target
The following graphic depicts the Rectangular Target Editor window.
These parameters Enter the orientation of the

define the size of the target from local north. The
target. Length is orientation is zero when
parallel to the local aligned to local north and
N/S, providing no increases clockwise.
orientation
is applied.
Type a value in the Up and
Down fields to change a
You can offset the rectangular target to a
geometric center of cuboid target. The top of
the target from the the target is Up, the
plan-to point by distance above the plan-to
entering X (local point. The bottom of the
East) and Y (local target is Down, the
North) offset. distance below the
plan-to point.
Type the dip angle you want to be on at the target. This is 90° minus the inclination of
the target. Type the azimuth (direction from local north) of the down dip direction. This
is the direction a ball would roll if placed in the formation bedding plane. This is not the
orientation of the target shape.

.
Defining Equivalent Formation Thickness
Target up and down thicknesses are used to define equivalent formation thickness.
This method is useful because you can define the aiming point at a given depth
below the formation top. For example, if you have a dipping formation that is
30 m thick but want to drill down dip 5 m below the formation top, you define the
aiming point as 5 m up, 25 m down. This method is applicable to all
target geometries.
Polygonal Targets
The following graphic depicts the Polygonal Target Editor window:
Each point on a polygon

may be given its own
name or label.
Wedge targets may be

defined by changing
thickness Up and Down
for each polygon point.
Enter the orientation of the

target from local north. The
orientation is zero when
aligned to local north and
increases clockwise. If you
define a dip angle, this is
the down dip direction of
the equivalent formation.
A polygon can have any number of points defined on it using the points
defined using the grid (shown above).

Three methods are available to define points on a polygon:
• X and Y – Enter local x- and y-coordinates from the target aiming

point to define a polygon shape. By default, the last point is joined
to the first to close the polygon. The Y dimension is parallel to the
local N/S, if no orientation is applied.
• Map E and Map N – Alternatively, enter the map coordinates of

the target as given by the geologists. The local x- and y-coordinates
are computed based on the target center. If the target center is
moved, these periphery points move as well.
• Well Viewer – Define Polygonal Targets – With the target created,

click the Define Polygonal Targets icon ( ). The viewer displays
a plan view of the target, on which you can use the mouse to click
each point on the polygon. Depress the icon after all points are
clicked, and the Target Editor will join up the first and last points.
For help on other target geometry, see the online help.
Defining Drilling Targets

If the geologist gives you the dimensions for a target and you drill to it
using MWD, you may hit it near the edge. When the path is later
surveyed by using a gyro, quite often the wellbore ends up outside
the target.
To prevent this situation, the planners should reduce the geologists

target by the expected survey error radius to be found by drilling with
MWD (which might be tied to a gyro at the previous casing). The
reduced target is known as a drilling target. It is a zone within the
geological targets that, when drilled within and monitored by using
survey instruments with inaccuracies, has a good chance of hitting the
geological target boundary.
The drilling target tool creates a new target that has been reduced in size
from the original by the survey errors at the target depth. It requires a
target that is big enough to fit the survey errors and a survey program
that penetrates the target.
You should create a survey program from a plan with the survey tools
for the situation when drilling the final section of the hole to the target
(that is, gyro in intermediate casing and MWD in open hole).

The drilling target tool may be used to design a cost-effective survey

program applied to the given geological target sizes.
Select Design
Use this tree control to select the wellbore design that contains the
survey program, and hence the survey errors, you want to use to
compute the drilling target.
Confidence Level
Enter the confidence level (1% - 99%) required to hit the target using the
survey errors from the selected design.
Create Drilling Target

After a design has been selected and a confidence level entered, click
this button to create the drilling target.
Delete Drilling Target

Click this button to delete a drilling target.
View Points in NotePad

Click this button to display the computed target points in text format.
For an explanation of the differences between geologist’s and driller’s

targets, see the online help.
Using the Target Viewer

The target view displays the currently selected target, which you can
toggle as a Section, Plan, or 3D view with the usual 3D tools available.
You can use the Target Viewer to define polygonal targets and to change
the landing point for directional well planning calculations. For more
information about using the Target Viewer for designing polygonal
targets, see the online help.

Target Landing Point Adjust

When planning or doing project ahead, the Target Viewer has another
use. If a target is selected from a pull-down list, click Adjust to adjust
the landing point. The Target view is invoked in Adjust mode. Click
anywhere on the Section or Plan view to adjust the landing point. The
plan or projection immediately updates the calculations using this new
point. The target location is not changed.
To change the landing point for planning calculation:

The landing point or aiming point is defined in the Target Editor.
1. Create a new plan or open an existing plan.
2. Select a planning method that lets you select a target (for example,
a 2D slant well).
3. In the Plan Editor, select a target.
4. Click Adjust.
5. In the Target View window, move the cursor to the coordinates for
which you want to aim and click MB1.
6. The plan is automatically recalculated to hit that point.
• To change the horizontal location, click the Plan view

icon ( ).
• To change the vertical location, click the Section view

icon ( ).
• You can also type in the landing point coordinates and click Set.
• To revert to the original coordinates, click Reset.

Creating a Plan Design
When a new plan design is created, the Plan Properties dialog box
automatically appears to allow you to identify the plan. The dialog box
has several tabs you can use to create the plan.
Naming the Plan Design and Defining the Depth Reference Point
The following graphic depicts the Plan Setup window.
Select Planned (Principal) to indicate

Lock the design to this is the final design rather than a
prevent other users prototype. You can only have one
from changing it. principal design for each wellbore.

Specifying the Tie-on Point

A Plan design must have a defined tie-on point to act as the starting point
of the design. Three choices of tie-on point methods are available. The
tie-on point can be defined explicitly, tied to the wellhead location, or
calculated based on a specified measured depth.
Designs must be tied on to define a

starting point and orientation. Tie-on
methods are:
• User Defined – Use this method to
explicitly define the tie-on point.
• From Surface – Specify the
inclination and azimuth at the
wellhead. These fields are disabled if
you are using the Well Reference
Point system.
• From Survey/Plan – Choose the
parent survey or plan and enter the
MD at which to tie onto it. Error
messages are displayed if you enter a
depth outside the depth range of the
parent survey/plan.

Defining the Survey Tool Program
Survey/Plan (Wellbore) This is the survey instrument

Enter the depth of the displays the survey or used to measure this survey
first measured station design used over the section from the list of survey
of the section. It given depth range. tool error models. This defines
should not include the Stations from this the error ellipse over the given
tie-in depth if it is survey are used to build depth range. To create a new
measured by another the planned wellpath. tool, use File > Properties >
survey instrument. Company > Survey Tools.
The Program Parts

check box is only Select the Do Not Use check Select the Use in Pref. check box
available when the box to indicate that this section to use this survey in preference to
grid contains more has been planned but will not later surveys. Normally, later
than one line. form any part of a survey depths in the program
definitive path. would supersede previous survey
depths, but, if a high accuracy
survey is planned with subsequent
overlapping lower accuracy
surveys, part of the lower accuracy
survey is overwritten.

Specifying the Vertical Section

Vertical section defines the vertical plane or planes to measure the well
displacement. A number of vertical sections may be defined and each
one will start at a specified vertical depth. Normally with single target
wellbores you need to define only one. However, with multiple targets
and major changes in direction, multiple vertical sections will better
represent the wellbore distances on a Section plot.
From the pull-down list, From the pull-down list, select the
select the target type. starting point of the
vertical section.
Use Azimuth Type to

select one of several
options to
automatically
determine vertical
section plane from
local north.

Using the Plan Editor
The purpose of the Plan Editor is to generate a series of curve types to

form a plan trajectory to one or more target locations. The Plan Editor
has three areas: an interactive plan grid, a number of plan method
windows for data entry and calculation, and a toolbar. The plan grid is
always present and displays all plan sections and enables key parameters
of each row to be changed. The plan method windows are used to define
individual curves or profiles. The plan method windows appear when
you activate one of the method toggles.
The COMPASS software has over 20 planning methods. Some methods

are divided into subgroups, which are accessed by using the planning
method icons. The planning methods can be divided into
two-dimensional tools, three-dimensional tools, and the
Wellpath Optimiser.
Each planning solution consists of rows displayed in the Plan grid. A

row is a line in space with a constant dogleg, build, or turn rate. Different
planning methods construct a different number of rows. For example:
• Hold adds one row.

• Slant Well adds three rows.
• Thread Targets adds multiple rows.
Rows are added to the grid by using the different planning methods.
Multiple planning methods can be used when constructing a single plan.
The keyboard can be used to insert new sections at any point in the plan,
or delete sections no longer required.
Rows in the grid are mathematically linked together by the planning

method that was used to construct them. Therefore, deleting a particular
row in the grid also deletes all rows linked to that method. To edit a
section in the plan, click the relevant row in the grid, and the plan
method for that section displays.

Accessing the Plan Editor

You can access the Plan Editor in the following ways:
• The Plan Editor is automatically displayed after you finish creating

a plan using the Plan Design Properties tabs.
• Double-click on an existing plan in the Explorer to open an

existing plan.
• Select File > Open > Plan and select the desired plan from the list
of existing plans.

The following graphic depicts the Plan Editor.

The plan grid is interactive. White Plans can be
cells are editable. If you change a Use the scroll arrows to adjust generated through
value, the plan recalculates. data in preset increments. more than one target.
Use the Planned Some plan methods have

Wellpath tab to view submethod buttons.
survey data generated
from the plan.
Select a Plan method. When a Plan method is When values have been entered
Different methods can be selected, the Plan Method for the plan method, click
combined to form a wellpath window displays the inputs Calculate to generate
through multiple targets. required to calculate sections of a trajectory.
that method.

Using the Plan Editor Toolbar

The planning toolbar is located at the top of the Plan Editor. Several plan
options are available from the toolbar:
Interpolate
Optimize Plan
Thread Targets
Survey Annotations
Plan Design
Properties Print
Save and Save As
Close
Help
Undo or Redo
Create Target
Import Survey
Project Ahead
Apply Walk
• Save As and Save – Save this plan by another name.
• Undo and Redo – Restore the last plan calculation.
• Plan Set-up – Edit the plan detail and tie-on information.
• Import Files – Import plan data from the Clipboard or a file.
• Thread Targets – Construct a trajectory through several targets.
• Apply Walk – Apply azimuth drift where expected in

rotary drilling.
• Interpolate – Interpolate between two survey data points.
• Optimize Plan – Optimize a plan for torque/drag, construct drilling

limits plots, or evaluate redrill options on idle wells.
• Projection Ahead – Quick calculation of vector to hit a target.
• Survey Annotations – Access the Annotations dialog box.

Annotations are comments on the Survey/Plan that do not fit into
the category of Casings or Formation Tops. Examples of possible
use of annotations include top of fish, sidetrack point, MWD Check
Shot, and Final Depth (TD). Annotations may be added to wall
plots and reports. Predefined auto-annotations can also be added to
the plan.

• Create Target – Create a target from a row of plan data. Highlight

the row, click Create Target, and the target is created and added to
the File > Properties > Project > Targets list.
Adding a Plan Section

To add a plan section:
1. Select the last empty line in the grid, and then select a Planning
Method option.
2. Fill in the entry fields that are displayed in the Plan Method
window section of the Plan Editor dialog box.
3. Click Calculate to compute the results.
4. Click the next line in the grid to accept the results and start the next
plan section or click Undo to reject the calculations and close the
curve data entry fields.
Deleting a Plan Section

To delete a plan section:
1. Click on a row within the plan section you want to delete.
2. Press Delete.
Deleting a Plan Section
You cannot delete individual rows of a plan section. You must delete the entire
plan section.
Incremental Measured Depths

The planning algorithms remember incremental measured depths, rather
than absolute measured depths. For example, a plan to a target has a
rathole of 300 ft; but then the target was moved and the plan angle was
changed. The plan would keep the 300 ft rathole even though the final
TD changes.

Planning Methods
Select plan methods by selecting an option on the Plan Editor.

2D planning methods within a vertical section include Slant and S-Well
design; 3D planning methods and tools include Build/Turn curves for
rotary drilled sections, Dogleg/Toolface curves for steerable drilling
design, Optimum Align, Thread Targets, and Nudge. Additional
planning methods are Hold to add a section with no build or turn, Walk
to apply predicted walk tendencies to hold sections in the plan, and the
Wellpath Optimiser, which is used to optimize the wellpath trajectory
for mechanical constraints, lowest directional drilling costs, or least
anticollision risk. A Project Ahead tool enables the bottom of the plan to
be projected to a target.
The COMPASS software has a number of planning methods suitable for

different types of directional drilling assemblies. All of these tools
construct mathematical curves. When entering parameters for a
planning method, the COMPASS software always constructs a path if it
is mathematically possible.
2D Directional Well Planning

The two-dimensional well planning tools construct wellpath trajectories
that follow the plane of a vertical section. That is, there is no turn from
the slot to the final target. The COMPASS software provides two
methods for planning 2D wells: Slant well and S-Well. A slant well is a
simple Hold-Build-Hold profile; whereas, an S-Well can be a
Build-Hold-Drop-Hold profile or a Build-Hold-Build-Hold profile.

Slant Well Design

The following graphic depicts 2D Slant Well design parameters:
To Design a Slant Well:

1. Type in the coordinates of the point to aim for or select a target.
2. Check two of the unknowns from the list of four below. Example
unknowns are 2nd Hold Length and Maximum Angle Held.
3. Enter the two known parameters:
• 1st Hold Length is the length of initial hold section before the
kick-off point, or, more simply, the kick-off depth. Enter zero for
no kick-off length.
• 1st Build is the build-up rate.
• Maximum Angle Held is the tangent angle of the profile.
• 2nd Hold Length is the length of the tangent hold section.
4. Click Calculate to compute.
Like all planning methods, the entry parameter values can be changed,
the selected parameters can be changed, other parameter types can be
defined, and the plan can be recalculated as many times as necessary
without having to exit from the drop-down window.

S-well Design
An S-well has three sections, Build-Hold-Build/Drop, and is defined by
seven parameters. You can also add a hold for the kick-off.
The following graphic depicts 2D S-Well Design parameters:
To Enter a 2D S-well Profile:

1. Type in the coordinates of the point to aim for, or select a target.
2. Select two of the unknowns from the list of seven, shown below.
Example unknowns are 2nd Hold Length and Maximum
Angle Held.
3. Enter the five remaining parameters:
• 1st Hold Length is the length of initial hold section before the
kick-off. Enter zero for no length before the kick-off.
• 1st Build Rate is the build-up rate.
• Maximum Angle Held is the intermediate tangent angle of
the profile.
• 2nd Hold Length is the length of the intermediate
tangent section.
• 2nd Build Rate is the second build or drop rate, which is a
positive (+) or negative (–) value.
• Final Inclination is the inclination you want to achieve at
the target.

• Final Hold Length is the distance from the end of the last build
to the target. Enter zero if you do not want a straight section
before the target.
The following graphic depicts an S-Well Plan example:
The preceding example displays a planned S-Well that is planned to

target T9 with the kick-off point at 1500 ft, initial build rate of 2º/100 ft,
second drop rate of 3º/100 ft, to a final inclination of 10º,with a final
hold length to the target of 1450 ft. With these input parameters, the
calculated inclination of the tangent section is 62.86 º, with an interim
hold length of 3298.7 ft. The calculated plan is shown above in 3D (left)
and Vertical Section (right), with each planned section highlighted with
boundary lines.
3D Well Planning
3D planning methods assume that the well is drilled under some form of
directional control, where the well can be turned to a given azimuth from
a particular measured depth.

Build/Turn Curves
The mathematics of Build/Turn curves assumes that the wellpath is
wrapped around the surface of a cylinder. The shape of the wellpath is
resolved into two planes: vertical (inclination) and horizontal
(direction). The build rate is the rate of change of inclination, and turn
rate is the rate of change of direction or doglegs in the vertical and
horizontal planes, respectively.
Build and Turn curves are constructed by assuming that the sections are
drilled using a rotary drilling assembly. A number of submethods are
available to plan different types of Build/Turn curves, utilizing different
types of available information during the design.
The following graphic depicts the Build/Turn Curves planning models:
Build/Turn submethods are selected by clicking the appropriate icon at

the bottom of the Plan Method window. Selecting different icons results
in different parameter fields being active and inactive. Active fields
require a value for the submethod to work. Inactive fields are calculated
using the entered parameters.
For more detail, see the online help.

The following graphic depicts a Build/Turn drop-down layout:
Required fields
are active.
Calculated fields
are grayed out.
Build/Turn submethod icons. These Some Build/Turn methods enable a

activate the required parameter target TVD or location to be selected.
entry fields when pressed. If a target is selected, the Target
Adjust option is also available.
Dogleg/Toolface Curves
The mathematics of Dogleg/Toolface curves assumes that the wellpath
is wrapped around the surface of a sphere—that is, a circular curve with
orientation defined by toolface and radius defined by dogleg. Toolface
is the direction from high-side of the hole. Toolface is 0º at high-side and
180º at low-side. Looking down the wellbore, toolface is positive
clockwise and negative counterclockwise. If the wellbore has no
inclination, toolface is referenced to local north.
Dogleg/Toolface curves are constructed by assuming that the sections

are drilled using a steerable drilling assembly. A number of submethods
are available to plan different types of Dogleg/Toolface curves that use
different types of available information during the design.

The following graphic depicts the Dogleg-Toolface Curve submethods:
Similarly to Build/Turn curves, Dogleg/Toolface curve submethods are

selected by clicking the appropriate icon at the bottom of the
drop-down layout.
The following graphic depicts the Dogleg/Toolface drop-down layout:
After calculating, the grayed out

fields display their calculated values.
Depending on the
selected submethod, the
appropriate parameter
fields are activated.
Plan to tangent to a point

The Dogleg/Toolface submethods generates two sections: either
are the same as Build/Turn curves, Hold-Curve or Curve-Hold.
except the calculated wellpath shape
is different.

Build/Turn vs. Dogleg/Toolface

As discussed in the last two plan method sections, Build/Turn and
Dogleg/Toolface plan profiles have a significantly different geometry.
Build/Turn plans approximate to Radius of Curvature curves that follow

the surface of a cylinder. These curves emulate rotary drilling where
build and walk are predicted. Build/Turn can also design a flat turn
where the inclination remains constant—for example, when
sidetracking to a different azimuth.
Dogleg/Toolface plans construct a Minimum Curvature geometry that

follows a great circle route around the surface of a spheroid.
Dogleg/Toolface curves cannot be used to design a flat turn; the
inclination changes through the turn. For short turns, dogleg and
toolface orientation remain constant. For larger turns, Dogleg/Toolface
curves cannot construct a path with constant dogleg and toolface
orientation—they change over the turn. This effect can be considerable
over a long distance.
Optimum Align
The Optimum Align planning method adds three sections: Curve, Hold,
and Curve (also called Steer-Hold-Steer). You can specify a final
inclination and direction for the end of the final curve, or, if you select
two targets, the COMPASS software computes the inclination and
direction between them for you. If you select a single target, the
COMPASS software lines up on the target to plan the well down dip.

The following graphic depicts Optimum Align Planning Methods:
To Build an Optimum Align Profile

1. Set restrictions on the curve shape in one of three ways:
• Doglegs – Specify the doglegs of both curves.
• TVDs – Enter the start and end TVD of the intermediate hold
section (or TVD at end of first turn, TVD at start of second turn).
• Tangent Length – Enter the length of the intermediate hold

section, the COMPASS software calculates the TVDs and 
Inc/Azi. If you enter 0 for the tangent length, the COMPASS
software computes a Curve-Curve trajectory that has no
tangent length.
2. Select the first target to land the wellpath. You can adjust the
landing point vertically/laterally using the Target Adjust tool. You
can add a short section before the first target by specifying Hold
length with or without a build rate before hitting the first target.

3. Determine the final inclination and azimuth using one of the

following methods:
• Selecting a second target to follow on to:
— Pick a target—the target you want to hit
— Line up on target—the target you want the wellpath to line

up on at the end of the second curve. This target is
remembered in the plan, and a hold is computed between
the two targets.
• Defining the end vector at the target:
— Pick No Target (Freehand) – If Target 1 has a dip and strike,

the COMPASS software assumes you want to plan down
dip and calculates inclination and azimuth accordingly.
These values are defaults that can be changed. If you want
to plot sensitivities in the Wellpath Optimiser based on N/S
and E/W coordinates, you must enter a freehand target.
When doing so, these parameters appear in the profile grid
for editing.
— Inc – Enter the final inclination required.
— Azi – Enter the final required direction.

The following graphic depicts an Optimum Align plan example:
Kick Off Point
First Curve section from Kick Off Point to start

of Tangent section, DLS = 2.5 deg/100ft
Tangent section from end of first turn to start of

second turn
Second Curve section from Tangent section to

target T8, DLS = 3.0deg/100ft
Plan to hit target T8 with wellpath orientation

aligned with target T9.
T9
Simple hold section to hit second target T9
The preceding example displays an Optimum Align plan to target T8

defined using two doglegs. When the plan hits target T8, the wellpath
trajectory lines up to point directly at T9 so the well can be held to hit
T9. This type of method is very effective to plan a well with the
directional drilling completed top hole to limit costs. Deeper in the well
after hitting T8, the well can be drilled with a stiff assembly and held to
the final TD.
You can enter a short section before the first target by specifying exit
length and build rate on the tangent length line.
The project back feature can be used to achieve similar results. Project
back is also used to create soft landings into a target.

To create a locked section between two targets:
1. Use optimum align as previously described to design to the second

target (that is, the final target).
2. Project back and select the first target.

3. Create a soft landing into Target 1 by highlighting the row in the

planning grid that contains Target 1, and then project back again.
Enter the Course Length (CL) required and the build rate into the
target. Click Calculate.
Hold Tool
The Hold tool is a very useful utility for defining planned kick-off
points, or extending the trajectory beyond a target.
Thread Targets
Click the Thread Targets icon ( ) on the Plan Editor to access the
Thread Targets dialog box.

Thread targets plans curved profiles through a series of targets, with a

number of plan methods available between each pair of targets. This tool
is very useful for quickly generating rough plans through a number of
targets to see what magnitude of doglegs are required to plan through
them. It is also commonly used to plan wells up-dip, using decreasing
TVD targets.
The following graphic depicts the Thread Targets Planning Options:
For each one of the Planning methods, the Thread Targets tool also
enables you to select how the targets are sorted. The options are: by
increased displacement from the slot origin, descending TVD,
ascending TVD, or by Name. The last option enables targets to be sorted
in any order using the order in which the targets were placed in the
thread list.

The following graphic displays the Target Threading sort methods:
Desc TVD
The Thread Target window enables you to select which targets you want
to thread. The targets displayed are those selected by the
current wellpath.
Target Sort Methods
Target Thread Methods: The COMPASS software tries to use

• Curve Only this dogleg if possible; otherwise, it is
• Curve-Hold incremented automatically until a
• Optimum Align solution is achieved through
• Straight all targets.
• Least Turn

To Thread Targets:
For information, see online help.
Nudge
Nudge contains plan methods for horizontal or dipping formation
targets. It is also useful for inserting nudge sections into a plan to assist
with anticollision.
Simple Projection computes the trajectory to land at a vector at a

specified TVD, MD, or dogleg.
1. Enter the required inclination and azimuth.
2. Enter one other parameter from MD, TVD, or DLS. The other
parameters in the curve will be computed.

Project Ahead
Click the Project Ahead icon ( ) to access the Project To
dialog box.
Project Ahead is the process of looking forward from the current bit
depth to see if the path is heading towards the target. If the wellbore is
not on course, Project Ahead can be used to determine the correction
necessary to get back on the plan or to go directly to the target. The
projection is made from the last observation in the open survey, plus the
initial-hold length. Should stations be added to the survey, the projection
recalculates from the end of these stations. If anticollision is being used,
then the projection will be included in the anticollision scan.The results
are for information only, and are not added to the plan.
Select Project to Target, Plan, or Formation to
specify the required location, and the COMPASS Select User Defined Projection,
software computes the trajectory changes using Curve Only to specify the projection
one of the trajectory types. If the current wellbore distance to a MD or TVD as well as
has a principal plan, the actions required to return the curve rates, and the COMPASS
to the plan are indicated. This also works for software computes the new location.
dipping formations.
Select Target,
Formation, or Plan
for Project To.
Select the method

you want to use. For
more information on
the methods, see the
online help.
Click Calculate to calculate

the projection. The
Projection Steps will be
displayed.

Applied Walk Rates

With noncontrollable rotary BHAs and rock bits, the hole azimuth tends
to drift to the right (and sometimes to the left); this is known as “walk.”
After a few wells have been drilled in the area, you should know roughly
how much correction or lead azimuth to apply to hit the target. Different
amounts of walk are associated with different formations, which can be
defined by vertical depth.
If the wellpath is properly led, steering should not be required, because

the natural walk tendency brings the wellpath into the target. If walk is
not included in the design—that is, if the wellpath is planned as tangent
sections between targets—frequent steering could result as the well is
corrected to counteract the natural walk tendency.
Enter the TVD of the start of a

known walk section. This value
may correspond to a formation
top, change in lithology, or entry
into a geological structure.
To apply walk rates to a plan with straight sections defined:
1. By using one of the 2D planning tools for Slant or S-Well, plan to

one target that has been created in the Target Editor.
2. Click the Walk icon ( ) in the toolbar.
3. Enter a number of walk rates in the grid, and the TVDs at which
you anticipate the drift begins. A positive walk is to the right; a
negative walk is to the left.
4. Click OK or press Enter to apply the walk rates. The COMPASS

software modifies the well plan by adding new sections at walk
horizons and uses the first target in the plan as the walk target. It
only applies walk to straight sections. If you modify a walked plan
by using another planning method, you will not be able to restore
the original unwalked plan.

Using the Plan Optimiser
The Plan Optimiser is designed to help you optimize the plan geometry
for mechanical or anticollision conditions. It can cycle various plan
constraints and then run the trajectory through torque-drag analysis.
Each result is examined for the maximum torque, tension, buckling, side
force, and fatigue condition relative to the pipe limit for this condition.
The optimum solution can be based on your preference or optimized to
be the lowest stress condition meeting all of the criteria. The mechanical
results can be reported or graphed, or the trajectory can be fed back into
the current plan for anticollision. The optimiser works on most common
plan types, though it is most useful for plans that have dogleg/build rates
and kick-off or hold sections. You can also choose to vary drill string or
BHA type and length.
The plan methods are supported:
• Kick-off depths by tie-on depth or hold section.

• Slant Wells and S-Wells where dogleg is specified.
• 3D Curve Hold (DT or BT) and Optimum align by doglegs.
• Straight sections at end of the plan or final projections.
Other plan methods can be in the plan, but their chosen parameters are
not changed.
The first occurrence of the plan type is the one that is manipulated. For
example, if a thread target method is chosen to hit multiple targets, it is
the first Optimum-Align or Curve-Hold that is changed, and the others
are not varied but are recalculated.
The grid is used to display one or a number of possible solutions when

you click the Calculate button. The grid is not available for edit, but a
number of actions are available through the grid. Selecting a line loads
the parameters from that line into the plan, analyzes it, and updates the
plan and views. Pressing the top label button of a number column sorts
the list, which shows the minimum first of this parameter. Pressing the
top label button of an error column (ER or Error Message) removes lines
that have errors from the list. It helps to do this before sorting.

Torque and Drag Calculations

The Torque Drag calculations used in this simulation are standard “soft
string,” and have been optimized for speed. They are run at the sample
interval used for the plan survey; this is +/- 100 ft or shorter for more
severe doglegs. It is an approximation of the model used for the
WELLPLAN™ software for Windows®, and it should not be used as a
substitute when more accurate results are required. There are a number
of differences:
• Tortuosity is introduced directly into the side force calculation

rather than changing the survey.
• Sinusoidal Buckling is computed using joint diameter for

hole clearance.
• Friction is split into radial (torque) and along hole

(sliding) components.
• Analysis includes overpull to determine maximum for

stuck/jarring loads.
The numbers for the torque, tension, fatigue, and buckle mean
the following:
Value = Tubular Load Limit / Actual Max Load.
So, if a column is selected, the maximum value is listed at the top, which
is, in fact, best limit/load ratio. It reports the maximum value for the load
in the whole string for each of the four load cases. Numbers greater than
one mean the limit has not been reached by any actual load.
It is a bit like casing design safety factors. The following values could
be used for the numbers:
• Tension = Pipe tensile yield/Actual max tension.
• Torque = Pipe joint make-up torque/Actual max torque.
• Buckling = Pipe Critical Buckling Force/Actual Max pipe

compressive axial force.
• Fatigue = Fatigue stress limit/Actual max bending stress 25000 psi

for DP, 18000 for HWDP and 13000 for casing or collars. The
bending stress is compensated for tension.

Load Cases
This simulation uses five load cases to generate ranges of forces on the
drill string.
• On-bottom drilling/rotating using weight on bit and rotary torque.

The drilling case can include sliding friction when steering with
a motor.
• Off-bottom rotating the drill string with no bit weight and no

bit torque.
• Pick-up (pulling out of hole) uses positive drag forces only and
no torque.
• Slack-off (running into hole) uses negative drag forces only and
no torque.
• Overpull uses defined stuck-force plus positive drag forces; It

assumes you are pulling pipe and encounter a resistance force at the
bit (and are not rotating).
Compound Friction
These load cases do not model compound friction, such as Top Drive rotating while
running pipe. If compound load analysis is required to model actual pipe angular
velocity, you should use WELLPLAN Torque/Drag instead.

Plan Optimiser Editor

The following graphic depicts the Plan Optimiser Editor.
Error column flags Torque/Drag ratios compare worst
which plans fail Error Type column case string load against string rating.
Torque/Drag or details reason behind You can order plans from best
Planning constraints. plan row failure. to worst.
Results Grid displays

Torque/Drag and Cost
for different calculated
planned trajectories
within user-entered
planning constraints and
enables you to
compare results.
Tabs enable you to

define precise or
range of values for
different types of
planning parameters.
A single plan trajectory can be A number of plans can be

optimized within the ranges of calculated for each one of the
entered constraints in terms of ranged parameters. Results for
Costs, Mechanical Limitations or all plans are then displayed in
Anticollision constraints. the results grid.
To start the Plan Optimiser, a plan must be open. An associated Plan

Optimiser view shows the torque-drag and side-force charts for the
current plan. Closing the plan closes them all; closing the Optimiser
closes itself and the Optimiser view only.

Plan Editor Interaction

You may return to the plan editor and manipulate the plan when the Plan
Optimiser is active. To operate the Plan Optimiser, calculate a plan in
the Plan Editor, and then click the Optimiser icon ( ).
After the plan changes, the Optimiser recalculates torque-drag and

updates the graphs (and gives an error message if a mechanical
constraint is exceeded). When you close the Optimiser, you have the
option to update the plan with the optimized data. Click Yes if you want
to modify the plan, or click No if you want to retain the original plan and
discard the plan chosen by the Optimiser.
Data Context
The Optimiser data is saved in a file with the well so all optimizations
on the well use the same data. The file is called W*.WOP, where * is the
well number, and it is stored in the COMPASS\OUTPUT directory.
Using the Optimiser Tabs

The Optimiser has eight tabs that contain a number of entry fields. Some
tabs have one or two Use Range check boxes, which indicate a
parameter that can be cycled or optimized. Depending on the plan
methods used, some of the options may not be available. Parameters that
can be varied have a minimum, maximum, and step field. The minimum
field contains the default value for this parameter if is not to be cycled,
and it is the minimum value for the cycling range when the check box
is selected.

Profile Tab
The Profile tab contains the plan variables from the Plan Editor. In the
Optimiser, you can select any number of these user-entered cells to run
a range through or optimize for.
Specify the range to be used

in the analysis.
Select the Use check box to

indicate the associated
variable should be used in
range analysis.
Drill String Tab

The Drill String tab is the entry point for the work string for the torque
drag and hydraulics analysis. You can enter up to six sections by name
and length. The catalog items are taken from the tubes.csv file. Minor
BHA items like bits, motors, jars, subs, or stabilizers, do not
have entries.
Select the component from the
pull-down list. Enter the The total length of the
components from the top down. component section.
The length of the top
item is computed from
the total depth of the
design, so there is no
need to be exact here.
The bit/shoe is
assumed to be at the
total depth.

Open Hole Tab

The Open Hole and Cased Hole tabs allow the setting of some of the
hole section conditions.
Friction Factor is the component of friction affecting

the torque and drag results. Example values are 0.21
for oil-based mud and 0.29 for water-based mud.
Specify the depth of the bit. If this is set

to zero, the bit is assumed to be at the
TD of the plan.
The hole diameter is the

bit diameter.
Tortuosity is a measure of the

roughness of the hole when drilled, in
terms of dogleg severity. Example Select the Max Angle check box to define a
values for open hole are 0.25 for hole maximum allowable hole angle in this cased hole
drilled mainly rotating, and 1.0 for (allows for borehole stability or running of
hole drilled while steering (in wireline tools).
degrees/100 ft or 30 m).
Cased Hole Tab

The Cased Hole tab allows the setting of conditions in cased hole.
Friction Factor is the component of friction

affecting the torque and drag results. The
value is unitless. Example values are 0.17 for
oil-based mud, 0.24 for water-based mud, and
Specify the depth of the casing 0.30 for brine.
shoe. The location is interpolated
from the plan. If the casing depth is
zero, the open hole values are
taken to surface.
Specify the inside

diameter of the casing.
Tortuosity is a measure of the
roughness of the casing in terms
of dogleg severity. Example
values for cased hole are 0.25 for Select the Max Angle check box to define a maximum
smooth hole, and 0.5 for rough allowable hole angle in this cased hole (allows for
hole (in degrees/100 ft or 30 m). borehole stability or running of wireline tools).

Drilling Tab
This tab contains common drilling parameters for the simulations.
Torque on Bit is the assumed torque required to

Select the Use Sliding Drilling
drive the bit and/or mud motor. The Torque on Bit
check box to include wellbore drag in
and Weight on Bit parameters define the load
the drilling load case. Otherwise, the
acting on the bottom of the string. These loads are
string is set to rotating, and no string
used as the starting conditions for the soft string
drag is incurred. You will notice that
Torque/Drag calculations.
buckling becomes much less of a
problem when the string is rotating.
Overpull Weight is the allowable pulling
tension at the bit used to trip jars or free
stuck pipe. The overpull load condition is
usually the case for maximum tension and
includes the drag forces when pulling out of
a hole.
Mud Weight is the mud density of the
drilling fluid, which is assumed to be
constant inside and outside the pipe.
Enter the total flow area, PV, and YP of the bit to

be used for determining hydraulic limits.
Cost Tab
These parameters are used in the time and cost estimates.
Operating Day Rate is the total cost

per day for this drilling rig,
plus services.
Production Casing Cost is the cost

of production casing for cased hole
section in terms of cost/length.
Liner Casing Cost is the cost of the

liner to complete the open hole Enter rates of penetration for rotating or
section in terms of cost/length. steering for the vertical depths to be
encountered. This table is used to determine
time costs for drilling the directional plan.

Limits Tab
Anticollision
Select this option to configure the analysis to determine whether plans
collide with offset wells. Define an anticollision boundary area around
the planned wellbores by entering a minimum range and depth ratio in
terms of x/1000. This computation is only possible if you have an
anticollision graph (ladder, traveling cylinder) open with the required
offset wells.
Note
Having a large number of offset wells slows down the Optimiser.
Tension Safety
This is the allowance for torque or tension yield. For example, 1.25 is
80% of yield, or over-torquing. A value less than 1 is not accepted.
Side Force Limit

This is the threshold before it is assumed that tool joints cause casing
wear or keyseating. This constraint is optional; select the check box to
use the constraint.
Maximum number of trials

This is the maximum number of option combinations performed when
you click the Calculate button. This feature prevents the Optimiser from
spending a large amount of time computing several thousand plans
when you enter a wide range of combinations. If you have a fast PC, you
can set this value as high as 2,000, although a value of 100-500 is
more common.

Offset Tab
The Offset tab allows for offset wells to be analyzed as redrill

candidates. After an initial plan is designed, plans can be generated from
these offset wells using a sidetrack depth range specified in the grid.
When calculated, a list of the computed trajectories for each of the
offsets selected will be displayed in the results grid. This list can then be
sorted by cost or any of the other engineering constraints to obtain the
best candidate for re-entry.
After the results are displayed in the grid, the desired plan can be
selected. If the Optimiser is closed down while a plan is selected, it will
create the plan in the new wellbore automatically and open it.
Wellbore
Displays the list of offset designs that were selected prior to entering the
Wellpath Optimiser.
Use AC
Select the check box to use the offset design for anticollision
consideration. These will only be used if the anticollision limit was
checked in the Limits tab.
Use ST
Select the check box for any offset design that will be considered as a
candidate for re-entry.

ST min
Enter the minimum sidetrack depth for the offset wells selected as
re-entry candidates.
ST max
Enter the maximum sidetrack depth for the offset wells selected as
re-entry candidates.
Step
Enter the sidetrack depth increment for which the plans will be
calculated between ST min and ST max.
Buttons and Other Features
Calculate or Optimise?
Differences between the Calculate and the Optimise buttons include:
• The Calculate button runs every possible scenario within each

range that has been chosen and lists them in the Grid. Click the
columns or lines and look in the Plan Editor or views to decide
which result is best. For instance, if the following are chosen: a
kick-off depth range of 1000 to 2000 at steps of 100 and a build rate
range of 1 to 2 degrees/100 at a step of 0.1, then clicking the
Calculate button runs 11x11=121 simulations. A default limit on
the number of simulations is set in the Options tab, but it can
be increased.
• The Optimise button, on the other hand, calculates only the best
possible solution. Its optimum criteria is the minimum of the four
limit ratios (that is, the load case closest to the limit). It then
chooses the solution that, through all the ranges defined, has the
maximum limit (in other words, is the least loaded string). The
optimized solution allows you to scan more variables at one time
than the Calculate option.
Which button you choose depends on how constrained the problem is.
If the sheet is completely clean, then the Optimiser is more useful. If the
drilling situation is fairly well defined, but can vary two or three options
(like KOP, DLS), then the Calculate option is adequate.

An additional consideration is that the optimized solution hunts by using

any variable within the Min/Max range without the step value, while the
Calculate option uses the step sizes.
Tubular Catalog
The tubular catalog used for the optimiser is called TUBES.CSV and is
located in the COMPASS\CONFIG directory. It can be loaded into a
spreadsheet and edited. The entries are grouped by type and listed within
each group in order of size, and then by yield strength. This order should
be maintained because the logic of the optimiser depends on it. The units
are API and are not changeable. The file contains the
following columns:
• Name, used for the selection and reporting
• Pipe body outside diameter (in)
• Pipe body inside diameter (in)
• Tool Joint outside diameter (in)
• Pipe weight per length (actual) (lbf/ft)
• Tensile Yield strength (lbf)
• Make-up Torque (lbf.ft)
• Fatigue Strength (psi)
• Pipe Joint Length (ft)
• Tubular Type (1-4) (1=Drill Pipe, 2=Drill Collar, 3=HWDP,

4=Casing)
• Material Type (1-4) (1=Steel, 2= Aluminium, 3=BeCu,

4=Titanium)

Plan Optimiser Viewer

The following graphic depicts the Plan Optimiser Graphics for extended
Build-Hold-Build-Hold Sub-Horizontal Plan:
The Plan Optimiser graph is a plot of the torque, tension, and side forces
on the currently selected plan. The Viewer appears when the Plan
Optimiser form is called from the Plan Editor. It can be closed without
closing the editor. The viewer is intended to provided a visual
representation of how close the currently selected plan is approaching
any mechanical constraints, such as contact force limit, API tensile
yield, or make-up torque limit. This graph is not intended to be a
replacement for a full torque/drag analysis.
The Graphs
A view of torque/drag results in graphical form is given when the
Optimiser is open. It updates when any single analysis is run, or when a
line is selected from the grid. There are three graphs; each single graph
can be altered by clicking in its axis area.
Measured Depth Against Torque

This graph has a number of lines:
• On-bottom Torque (blue)

• Off-bottom Torque (green)
• Make-up Torque Limit (red)

Measured Depth Against Tension/Compression

The tension graph has a number of lines:
• On-bottom Drilling (blue)

• Off-bottom Rotating (green)
• Pick-up Weight
• Slack-off Weight
• Overpull Weight (yellow)
• Helical Buckling Limit in Compression (red)
• Pipe Yield Limit in Tension (red)
Vertical Depth Against Vertical Section with Side Force

Commonly known as the hairy wellpath plot, this graph is good for
visualizing the points in the wellbore profile at which there is maximum
contact force. The strike marks indicate the side force per tool joint.
Marks on the lowside of the wellpath indicate gravity forces. Marks on
the highside of the wellpath indicate tension in dogleg forces.
This graph includes:
• the wellpath vertical section line (yellow)

• side forces adjacent to the wellpath (blue)
• side force limit lines where requested (red)
• wellpath labels every 1000 ft or 500 m MD
• casing shoe marker to indicate the Last Casing depth
The red side force limit lines can be turned on and off by selecting use
side force limit in the Options tab of the Wellpath Optimiser.
Bubble View
This plot displays a bubble plot of the first two options checked in
the Profile tab. This view is most useful when N/S and E/W
coordinates are sensitized for a given target TVD. In this case, you
can essentially create a drilling limits plot showing the reachable
area for a given TVD.

Planning and Anticollision
The Anticollision module is designed to use the active path as the

reference wellpath when performing an anticollision scan against offset
wells. If a plan is open, the anticollision module scans down the plan.
This constructive feature allows plans to be designed to adhere to a
company’s anticollision policy as defined within Company Setup.
Changes to a planned trajectory cause all anticollision graphs or
wallplots to be updated automatically. Any reports that are open would
need to be regenerated.
The following graphic depicts the 3D Proximity graph with a planned

sidetrack being scanned against an offset slant well:
The preceding example displays a planned sidetrack well scanning

against another wellpath in the same site. In this example, there is a
considerable collision risk, so this sidetrack trajectory has to be changed
for the plan to be approved prior to drilling.

Planning Reports
After designing a wellpath trajectory, an engineer must be able to

communicate that trajectory to other colleagues across disciplines in
order for it to be assessed.The COMPASS software provides several
methods to accomplish this: formatted reports, hard copy output of the
live graphs or multisized wallplots, and user-configurable export
file formats.
Planning Reports is accessed from the Planning menu if a plan is open,

or by clicking the Planning Reports icon ( ) from the main
COMPASS toolbar.
The following graphic depicts the Planning Reports window:

The Reference Level area displays reference level
information that determines what reports are available
for selection.
The Select Report area

contains a group of check
boxes that you select to filter
the list of reports that display
in the table.
Select (by highlighting) the

report you want.
Click:
Preview to preview the report on the screen.
File to generate the report to a file.
Print to print a hard copy of the report.

Planning Report Options

The Survey Report Options dialog box is displayed when you click the
Preview, File, or Print buttons on the Report dialog box if the report
contains survey data.
If the Interpolate check box is checked, the Interval field is active, and you can
set the depth interval at which to interpolate survey stations. Selecting this
check box also activates the Specify Depths option, which you can use to
interpolate by MD or TVD.
Select the Range check box to

set a specific depth range to be
included in the report. The From
and To fields become active, and
you enter a numeric value in
each to set the range.
Select the Include station at end

check box to include the end
station information.
Select the options you want included on the report.
Select the options you want

included on the report.

Chapter 6
AntiCollision Module
Overview
The Anticollision module provides the most critical functionality in the

COMPASS™ software affecting drilling safety and operator costs:
• safety in terms of collision avoidance and drilling close rules
• cost in terms of the potential risk of a wellpath interfering with one

or more offset wells, requiring decisions to be made on drilling or
production restrictions
Results from the Anticollision module are used directly to make these
types of decisions.
Companies differ in their approach to anticollision scanning. However,

the COMPASS software is designed to accommodate most commonly
used methods. Company anticollision policy is usually set out in a
corporate drilling procedures manual. This may be for your own
company or a client. The COMPASS software therefore sets
anticollision parameters at the Company Properties level, which is
typically locked and therefore protected from day-to-day users.
The COMPASS software enables you to perform an anticollision scan

down any open design, or survey, including project ahead sections
constructed from within the Survey or Plan Editors. The scan can be
conducted against any number of designs within the same well, site, or
project. Additionally, the scan can be applied against nearby designs
located in other projects or companies. If used correctly, the COMPASS
software is capable of detecting a collision risk from a reference well,
including all offset well trajectories that are defined in the COMPASS
database. Results are available on a variety of plots and reports.

Chapter 6: AntiCollision Module
Specifying Anticollision Analysis Parameters
The COMPASS Anticollision module is defined by four concepts
This concept... Determines...
Error System How positional uncertainty is calculated
Scan Method How wellpath separation is calculated
Error Surface How separation factor is calculated
Warning Type What criteria is used to issue warnings
The “Data Structure” section of this manual described how the Company
Properties dialog box is used within the COMPASS software to apply
company anticollision policies so that all anticollision results are
consistent within the same rules and assumptions defined by the chosen
models. It is very important that companies recognize the importance of
ensuring that COMPASS data is distributed to all sites with exactly the
same company properties, and that it is generally kept locked to prevent
the setups from being changed.

Use the File > Properties > Company > Properties > Anticollision tab
to specify the anticollision analysis properties
The error system The error surface

determines how the determines how the
positional uncertainty is separation factor is
calculated. calculated.
The scan method

determines how the
wellpath separation is
calculated.
The warning type

determines the criteria
used to issue warnings.
This grid is used to define a

number of anticollision warning
criteria. The columns and labels
that appear on this dialog box
depend on which warning type is
chosen.
Error Systems
Prediction of wellpath location uncertainty is fundamental to safe and
cost-effective well design. Wellpath trajectory is only imperfectly
represented by survey measurement and trajectory calculations. Because
survey instruments are not 100% accurate, errors can occur in a
calculated borehole trajectory. Uncertainty envelopes for wellpath
trajectory are calculated based on survey tool error models and provide
the minimum standoff distance to prevent wellbore collisions.
Uncertainty estimates range from field-based rules of thumb to strict
analytical and statistical methods.
The COMPASS software uses the ISCWSA or Cone of Error survey tool
error models.

ISCWSA
The ISCWSA committee’s remit was to “produce and maintain
standards for the Industry relating to wellbore survey accuracy.” A
number of companies participate. The committee recognized that
directional drilling requirements have moved on from the 1970s, when
the Systematic Ellipse model was constructed. Modern needs require
smaller geological targets to be hit, often drilled in mature fields with a
large number of nearby wellpaths. The simplistic WdW model could not
handle such strict requirements and accurately model additional
performance parameters measured from vendor survey tools.

A number of other factors provided the incentive for an alternative

industry model to be developed:
• Risk-based approaches to collision avoidance and target hitting

required positional uncertainty to be associated with confidence
levels, a term only implied with the WdW model.
• Changed relationships between operators, directional drilling, and

survey companies forced all parties to share information on tool
performance.
• Drilling and geoscience software enabled more sophisticated tool

error models to be incorporated, with results that could be viewed in
3D earth model visualizations.
• Survey program designs to hit smaller drillers targets were dictated

by tool error models and smaller geological targets.
As described in the “Survey Tool Editor” section of this manual, the

ISCWSA committee designed a dynamic survey instrument error model
specifically for solid state magnetic instruments (for example, MWD and
EMS). The resultant model is described in a paper published by
H.Williamson “Accuracy Prediction for Directional MWD” by Hugh
Williamson as SPE56702. Essentially, the model enables an operator or
survey contractor to define a dynamic number of parameters or error
terms appropriate for a survey instrument.
Cone of Error
This model assumes an error sphere around each survey observation. The
model is empirical and is based on field or test observation comparisons
of bottomhole positions computed from various instruments. The size of
the sphere is computed as follows:
Radius of sphere around previous observation + MD interval × survey

tool error coefficient / 1000.
The starting error around the wellbore is the well error plus the top
borehole radius. The survey tool error coefficient depends on the current
tool inclination and the values contained in the Inc/Error grid for that
survey tool.

Scan Methods
The purpose of an anticollision scan is to calculate the distance from the

scanning point on a reference well to the closest point on an offset well.
This distance is known as the center-to-center distance, or wellpath
separation. Different scan methods determine different separation
distances because each technique uses a different algorithm and may not
find the same closest point as another technique.
Four scan methods are available in the COMPASS software:
• Closest Approach 3D
• Traveling Cylinder
• Horizontal Plane
• Trav. Cylinder North
In the following explanations, the reference wellpath is the wellpath

being planned, drilled, or surveyed. You check the distance from the
reference wellpath to any number of offset wellpaths. The COMPASS
software scans down the reference wellpath at intervals that are defined
in the Interpolation Interval and computes the distance to the offset
wellpaths by using one of the following scan methods.
3D Closest Approach
At each MD interval on the reference wellpath, the COMPASS software
computes the distance to the closest point on the offset wellpath. At some
scanning depth on your reference wellpath, imagine an expanding spheroid.
The minimum separation occurs when the surface of the spheroid initially
touches the offset wellpath; separation is the radius of the spheroid.
Because the offset wellpath is now at a tangent to spheroid, the line of
closest approach is perpendicular to your offset wellpath.

The following graphics display the 3D closest approach scan method (left)
and the traveling cylinder method (right):
Traveling Cylinder
This scan method uses a plane perpendicular to the reference wellpath
and intercepting offset wellpaths as they cut through the plane. The
surface resembles a cylinder with the size of the maximum scan radius.
The traveling cylinder method computes distance from the offset
wellpath stations back to the reference wellpath. The benefit of this
method is that intercepts are detected even when the wellpaths are
approaching at a perpendicular. In this case, more than one point may be in
the traveling cylinder plane for the same depth on the reference.
Depths are interpolated on the offset wellpaths, which results in irregular

depths on the reference wellpath. Therefore, the 3D anticollision view and

traveling cylinders depth slice option are not possible with this method,
because they rely on regular depths on the reference.
Trav Cylinder North

This scan method uses the same perpendicular plane as the traveling
cylinder scan method, but toolface orientation from reference to offset is
added to current wellbore direction. The traveling cylinder plot is
oriented to Map North when the reference well is at low angles. Toolface
angle to an offset well is then reported as the angle from the high-side of
your current wellbore plus the azimuth of your current wellbore. This
method avoids the confusion in the traveling cylinders plot caused by
large changes in toolface angle when kicking off from vertical.
Horizontal Plane
The Horizontal Plane scan method calculates the horizontal distance
from the reference wellpath to the offset wellpath. It is similar to the
traveling cylinder method, except that the cylinder expands horizontally
irrespective of the wellbore direction. This method is not recommended
for horizontal wells that it might miss and directional wells where it
might provide late warnings because, when the well does approach, it
does so very quickly. It is in the COMPASS software, but do not use it.

The following graphic displays the Horizontal Plan scan method:

Comparing the Scan Methods

The most important difference in the methods is that they are all capable
of determining a different closest point. It is for this reason alone that
Scan Method should be defined within a company and locked, so that all
anticollision results can be compared on the same basis.
The following diagram highlights the differences by using the preceding

example. From the same reference well scan point, the different methods
have all found a different closest point, with different values of calculated
wellpath separation.
When comparing scan methods, assess the advantages and

disadvantages of each technique.

Traveling Cylinder Scan and Near-perpendicular Intersections

The primary deficiency with the traditional traveling cylinder method is
that it can miss near-perpendicular intersections if the scan interpolation
interval is large. The following graphic depicts the problem:
On the preceding graph, E4-S0 (right side) is the reference well being
scanned down. A2-S0 is the offset well. The graph displays a depth slice
that represents the orientation of the traveling cylinder at its scanning
point. As the traveling cylinder scans down E4-S0, it misses the nearby
A2-S0 well and finds a closest point some distance up A2-S0 and away
from the critical area. Even with the interpolation interval set at 25 ft, the
A2-S0 well is missed entirely.
Warning Types
When you scan a wellpath or plan against other wellpaths, you want the
program to report only those wellpaths that pose a collision risk. To

include wellpath positional uncertainty in the assessment of collision

risk, the COMPASS software can report separation factors or assess
against risk-based rules or depth ratios.
Error Ratio
Also known as ratio factor, error ratio is a value that includes center-to-
center separation and positional uncertainty. It can be modified to
include casing diameters.
The following graphic depicts the error ratio method and example
results:
As described in Company Properties, the COMPASS software enables

multiple ratio factor warning levels to be defined and a given warning or
action to be taken if such a level is exceeded. These warning levels
appear in the anticollision report and in some of the anticollision graphs
in the form of levels and color-shaded lines.
Depth Ratio
The depth ratio method forms an envelope about the wellbore
representing the minimum separation, with the ratio of depth increasing
until Max Radius is reached.

A ratio of 0.01 with a maximum radius of 10 m means that the minimum

allowable separation would consist of a cone expanding at 10 m per
1,000 m, reaching a maximum of 10 m at 1,000 m from the start depth.
After 1,000 m MD, the minimum separation surface would represent a
cylinder about the wellpath.
Rules Based
The rules based method uses a probability of intercept to evaluate risk.
A ratio of 0.01 means there is one chance in 100 wells drilled of
intercepting an offset wellbore. The warning grid in Company
Properties contains all of the possible rules that may be assigned to a
wellpath. The first row in the grid is the company default rule. When a
wellpath is selected for anticollision, this default rule is automatically
applied to that wellpath. Other rules have to be assigned directly in the
Offset Wells dialog box. A warning is given if the rule is determined to
fail when conducting the anticollision scan.
Error Surfaces
When you select an error system, you define how wellpath position
uncertainty is calculated. When selecting a scan method, you define how
wellpath separation is computed. The error surface method enables you
to choose how the radius of the error surface at the reference well
scanning point and the calculated closest point on the offset well are
calculated. The error surface choice allows you to override the standard
ellipse-to-ellipse (default) ratio calculations in anticollision and instead
use the largest dimension of error at a point to define a cone about the
wellpath. In most cases, this will be major axis of the ellipsoid. Using
the circular conic method is more conservative and produces lower ratio
values and more warnings. The separation factor calculation includes
the dimensions of the error ellipse for both reference and offset wells.
The three error surface choices are as follows:
• Elliptical Conic
• Circular Conic
• Combined Covariance
Elliptical Conic
The standard calculation of separation factor uses ellipse radius
intersections that are determined by projecting the error surface
ellipsoids onto the center-to-center plane calculated between the
reference well scanning station and its closest point on the offset well.

This method most accurately implements the survey tool error models,
because it uses the ellipsoid geometry and orientation as calculated by
the survey tool error coefficients along the course of the wellpath.
Because the center-to-center plane can intersect the error ellipsoid at any
direction from the wellpath, the resulting radius used in the separation
factor calculation ranges from the minimum dimension of the ellipse
(minor axis) to a maximum dimension (major axis). The ellipse also has
an intermediate axis with a magnitude somewhere between the minor
and major axis dimensions. Because the error radius varies in all
directions, the calculated separation factor is generally more optimistic
when compared against the Circular Conic method.
The following graphic depicts an error ellipse as intersected by center-

to-center plane:
Circular Conic
The circular conic method uses the largest dimension (major axis) of the
error ellipsoid to define a spheroid about the wellpath. Projected down
the wellpath, this becomes a cone. The circular conic method is always
the most conservative, because it uses the largest dimension of the
ellipse and therefore produces lower ratio values and more warnings.
In mature areas, some companies design wellpaths by applying the

circular conic method, if possible. If a well trajectory proves impossible
to design safely by using separation factors calculated by circular conic,
the operator can then use the elliptical conic method to evaluate how the

revised separation factors meet their close rules policy. Should elliptical
conic prove safe, the operator might then decide to go ahead and drill
that plan.
The following graphic depicts a circular conic error surface:
Combined Covariance
The combined covariance method combines the errors on the reference
and offset by covariance addition before any distance calculations are
performed. The error distance is then computed by the elliptical conic
method on the resulting single ellipsoid. Where casings are included, the
radii are subtracted from the center-to-center distance. The separation
factor derived from the combined covariance technique can be directly
correlated to collision risk because it represents the standard deviation
value for the “tail of the probability distribution.”

Projected Vector
Projected vector avoids the irregular and misleading results before and
after the closest point and will provide a more constant evaluation of the
errors. This method uses a cross product to determine the vector to
section the ellipsoid using:
u=RXO
Where:
R is the vector direction of the reference wellbore and

O is the vector direction of the offset wellbore.
The following are two examples to describe projected vector analysis.
Example 1
In this example, a high angle reference well has significant azimuth turn
and crosses a low angle well. Due to the latency of the azimuth error it
aligns along the depth axis of the well and has no significance for
collision avoidance. Notice that the 3D vector method includes it for

depths before and after the closest point resulting in the propagation of
irregular errors. The following is a plan view for illustration.
Example 2
Example two includes two high angle wells that cross over the top of
each other. Using vectors other than projected vectors lead to
unrealistically high errors where they should not. The non-closest
approach vectors lead to the inclusion of the large azimuth error,
whereas if you deliberately drill on the high side or low-side of another
well then inclination type error should only be considered. This is
known as the “Pedal Curve” problem. This is a side by side example
where major axes of ellipses cross over resulting in a ‘false’ sense of
security before and after the closest point. This method is satisfactory as

long as the analysis doesn't miss the closest point. The projected vector
will provide a more constant evaluation of the errors.
In this High-side/Low-side example, the method of wells crossing

should take advantage of the surveys errors being less in the inclination
direction i.e. above or below the offset wells. The “Pedal Curve” method
does not help here.

The “Pedal Curve” method seems to assume that there is no confidence

in the direction of reference well relative to the offset well (it can
approach from any direction). Yet we have quantified the position error
to the confidence shown in the ellipse shape. In reality there is a great
deal more confidence in the direction of the wells for a deep
intersection.The errors in inclination and azimuth measurements are
generally not cumulative with depth unlike error in position (with the
exception of continuous gyros or inertial instruments).

Ellipsoid Separation
The ellipsoid separation is the distance between the edges of two
ellipsoids.
Including Casings
Casing dimensions can be modeled within the anticollision radii. You
define these in the Casing Editor ( ,)so the anticollision calculations
will recognize them. Including casings reduces the center-to-center
distance by the sum of the offset and reference well casing radii. This
models edge-to-edge distance (metal-to-metal) of the casings in the
calculation of separation factor. This method assumes that the casing is
centered in the wellbore.

The following graphic depicts the effect of casings on calculated center-

to-center distance:

Selecting Offset Designs for Anticollision Analysis
Anticollision functionality is available by selecting the Analysis >

Anticollision Settings menu. After defining the calculation methods that
are used within a company to perform anticollision scans down a design,
survey, or project ahead section, you next select a group of offset
designs to scan against. Then you configure the scan by using the
Interpolation Interval dialog box. When performing a scan, the
calculated results are available in a number of graphs and reports.
Anticollision Offset Designs

To access the Anticollision Offset Well Selector, select Analysis >
Select Offset Designs, or click the icon on the toolbar.
In this dialog box, you use a tree control to select offset designs. Each
level in the hierarchy (Site, Well, Wellbore, Design) has a check box. If
a higher level than Design is selected, all designs belonging to that level
are included.
Designs are included in the choice list to allow multiple offset tracks per
wellbore (that is, planned and actual).

The following graphic depicts the Offset Design Selection dialog box.
Use the Filtering options to include designs
from sites within other projects and/or
companies within the plot, assuming they use
the same geodetic system and datum.
Use the Site,
Well, and
Wellbore lists
to manually
select which Select Filter by
designs from Type or Filter
the current by Range to
project will restrict offset
appear in plot. wells to those
You can of certain types
select or within a
individual given range of
wellbores, all the current
wellbores wellpath.
within a well, Specify type by
or all selecting File >
wellbores Properties >
within a site. Company >
Click a Properties >
wellbore, well, Wellbore
or site to Types.
select or
deselect it.
The Additional Surveys list displays the

surveys contained in the current reference Select the Save selection to database
wellbore. You can add surveys to the offset check box to save the Offset Design list
design list by selecting the check boxes with the design
associated with each item. The chosen
surveys appear in graphs and reports.
Filtering
To perform a rigorous anticollision scan, you select all wellpaths in the
current field and produce a Ladder plot or Anticollision report.
However, on large, multiple-site fields, this scan can take some time to
process. A less precise but quicker method is to use the filtering tools to
preselect only those wellpaths within a certain range of your current
wellpath.

You can filter on filtered wellpaths. For example, you can select all wells
of type PRODUCER by clicking Scan All. You can then select all
producers in a range by entering a range and initial distance from wellpath
origin and then clicking Scan Selected.
Filtering Does Not Perform an Anticollision Scan
Filtering does not perform an anticollision scan, it only helps you select wellpaths
against which to scan.
Specifying Anticollision Interpolation Intervals and Other Settings

The Analysis > Anticollision Settings dialog box is used to set the
anticollision interpolation interval type and the method for limiting
results by separation or ratio factor. The interpolation settings are used
for all anticollision calculations and also for the error ellipse report. For
more information about this dialog box, see the online help.
Select the Interpolate check box to interpolate the
reference wellbore for anticollision. If Interpolate is
not selected, the survey stations in the reference
wellbore (plan or survey) are used.
Range is used to limit the depth range or the

reference design that is used for anticollision
scanning.
Use Centre Distance, Separation Factor and

Ellipse Separation to limit the offset wellbore data
that appears in the plots and the scan report.
The direction from the reference well to the offset well at the reported depth may
be referenced to:
Highside Toolface - the toolface angle in the traveling cylinder pland measured
from highside of the reference well
Azimuth from North (azimuth angle from reference North (Grid/True) in the
horizontal plane.

Analyzing Results
Using Live Graphs

Live graphics are available to an engineer to assess anticollision risk.
These graphs may be used concurrently so that you can assess risk from
different perspectives. These graphs are termed “live” because they
update if any survey data or plan trajectories change.
Spider View
One of the traditional anticollision graph types, a spider plot, is a plan
view of a number of wells. Traditionally, a spider plot was easily
handdrawn by the directional driller or operations engineer as survey
data came in with measured and true vertical depths drawn adjacent to
the plotted wellpath trajectory. The spider plot displays wellpaths with
East (X-axis) against North (Y-axis). Two types of spider plot are:
• Spider View—Local, which shows the data using local coordinates.
• Spider View—Map, which shows the data using map (grid)

coordinates.
Because it only portrays the horizontal projection of the wellpaths, it is

difficult to visually assess anticollision risk, except perhaps if the TVD
labels are turned on so you can see two wellpaths cross or approach at a
similar TVD.
Viewing Casing Tunnels

If you turn on casings ( ) in the Spider and Template views, a tunnel is
drawn down the wellpath. The diameter of the tunnel is dependent on the
diameter column being filled in on the Casing editor.

Helpful Hints
• Always turn on errors to assess lateral uncertainty.

• Use the Line Data Reader to assess TVD proximity for nearby or
overlapping wells.
Ladder View
The Ladder view plots measured depth of the reference well against
calculated center-to-center separation of one or more offset wells. Use
this graph to assess the true anticollision risk of an offset well and
display center-to-center distance, magnetic interference equivalent
distance, error surface magnitudes, and ratio factor warning levels.
To Set Up a Ladder Plot

1. Set the anticollision scan limit and the depth range in the
Anticollision Settings dialog box. The scan limit sets the maximum
value on the Y separation axis.
2. Select the designs for inclusion in Offset Designs.
3. Start the Ladder Plot.
Optionally
• To change the scaling area of the graph, click the Graphics Options
icon in the toolbar.
• Select the scan method defined in Company Properties (usually

defined by Company Policy).

The following is a list of the graph toolbar icons that are commonly used
to help assess any collision risk for the ladder view:
Ladder View Graph Toolbar Icons

Click... To...
Display uncertainty ellipse magnitudes (R1 + R2) relative to each

wellpath.
Color wellpaths with appropriate ratio factor warnings.
Display Equivalent Magnetic Distance of casing in offset wells.
Use mouse to read wellpath name, center-to-center separation, and so

on.
Access the Graphics Options dialog box to change the y-axis scale.
Helpful Hints
• Always plot error bars to assess collision risk. Horizontal wells can have a
very large lateral uncertainty.
• Use the Line Data Reader to determine the exact closest point.
• Try limiting your Scan Limits in the Interpolation Interval dialog box to more
accurately assess critical areas.

Drag the depth of

interest bar to view
results at different
depths. The Traveling
Cylinder and 3D views
have a similar bar. If
the depth of interest is
changed on one view,
it will be changed on
the remaining views.
Equivalent Magnetic Distance

The Equivalent Magnetic Distance is a broad red line drawn on the
ladder view to show the combined magnetic effect of multiple casing
strings on the current plan. This line may be selected from the Options
tab in the Graph Options or from the toolbar icon.
The Equivalent Magnetic Distance line shows where the well plan
passes close to existing wells, and hence where magnetic interference
from casing can be expected. It is useful in survey program design when
determining where to plan the switch from gyroscopic to magnetic
single shots. A simple rule of thumb is if the magnetic equivalent
distance is less than 50 ft, then gyro survey tools should be used.
The scan differentiates drilled wells from planned wells by the status of
the survey program; only those wells with real surveys are assumed
drilled. A program which consists of a planned section tied to real
surveys will have status planned and will not be included in the scan,
even over the depth interval covered by the real surveys. Additionally,

only the part of the wellpath that is deeper than the sidetrack depth is
included in the scan.
The perpendicular distance to all neighboring drilled wells is calculated

at intervals down the planned well. The combined magnetic effect of all
casing strings is then expressed as an Equivalent Distance to a single
casing string (using the inverse-square law for magnetic fields). For
example, if there are four casing strings at 18, 22, 25, and 27 meters
distance, their combined magnetic interference would be equivalent to a
single string at a little over 11 meters distance. The algorithm does not
consider casing diameters.
Separation Factor View

The Separation Factor view plots measured depth of the referenced
wellpath against the Separation Factor with the offset wellpaths. The
plot automatically plots the warning levels as defined within the
Company Properties dialog box. This enables a quick review of the
separation factor against warning levels defined as company policy.
It can also be a very effective first place to look to determine the

anticollision risk associated with an offset well. The only drawback,
when compared to the Ladder view, is that you cannot determine the
center-to-center separation.
Helpful Hints
Use Graphics Options to change the vertical axis scale that is using Fixed Range
to something reasonable if you are using Scan Radius to limit results.
Traveling Cylinder View

One of the traditional anticollision plot types, the traveling cylinder plot,
shows the polar positions of offset wells relative to the reference wellpath
center. This is the distance to the offset well at an angle that is either
measured from the wellbore high side (toolface) of the reference wellpath,
or North (azimuth only when using Horizontal plane scan method). The
largest radius of the plot is the scan limit, and the distance scale is displayed
to the left of the graph. The interpolated labels on the traces are the

measured depth of the points on the reference wellpath, not the offset
wellpath.
Helpful Hints
• The reference wellpath is never shown on the traveling cylinder view; it is

assumed to plot in the center of the graph.
• The center-to-center separation shown on the traveling cylinder graph is
applicable for the configured scan method. Therefore, the traveling cylinder
graph is available for all scanning methods, not just the traveling cylinder
scan method. Do not confuse the traveling cylinder graph with the traveling
cylinder scan.
To Set Up a Traveling Cylinder Plot

1. Define the interpolation frequency and range limit in the
Anticollision Settings dialog box.
2. Select the wellpaths for inclusion in Offset Designs.
Optionally
3. Select the scan method defined in Company Properties (usually
company policy).
To determine the distance between the reference wellpath and an offset

wellpath at a given depth, follow the trace of the offset well until you
find the MD you require. Measure the distance from the center of the
plot to this point. That measurement is the distance between the
reference wellpath and the offset wellpath at that MD on the reference
well. The line data reader is useful for determining separation.
If the offset well point is along the 180 degree line, the offset wellpath
is below your reference wellpath. If it is along the 0 degree line, the
offset wellpath is above your reference wellpath. If it is in any other
direction, the offset well is off to the left or right as you look down the
well. The 90–270 degree line separates offset well positions that are
above the reference wellpath or below, assuming a wellbore reference.

The following is a list of the toolbar icons that are commonly used to assess
collision risk for the traveling cylinder view:
Traveling Cylinder View Graph Toolbar Icons

Click... To...
Toggle error “pedal” surface on and off.
Toggle error shadows on and off.
Color wellpaths with appropriate ratio factor warnings.
Display MD labels along the wellpath. Depths are for the

reference wellpath.
Display offset well labels at end of the wellpath.
Interactively traveling cylinder view or depth slice, used to

manually scan down the reference wellpath.
Use the mouse to read wellpath name, center-center separation,

and so on.
Access the Graphics Options dialog box to customize the plot.
Helpful Hints
• Turning on well and depth labels while in interactive mode enables you to
maintain a reference.
• Color shading provides a quick way to see where the critical intervals are
along each offset wellpath.
• If you do not see depth labels on the plot, you can set a labeling exclusion
zone (see Graphics Options).
Well in a Tunnel View

The Well in a Tunnel feature allows engineers to spend less time and
effort steering and more time rotating. Using the Well in Tunnel feature
you can visualize the correct position and trajectory of the well relative

to the plan. Well in a Tunnel shows only the allowable distance the
survey can move from plan and the acceptable tolerance of offset wells
and maximum deviation at specified depths. Plots are automatically
updated as surveys are entered in COMPASS™ software.
For this feature to work, you need a survey from an actual design, as well
as a plan for that wellbore. The Well in a Tunnel feature uses the
Traveling Cylinder and Ladder plots.
To Set Up a Well In a Tunnel:
1. Survey stations must be entered into the Survey Editor
2. Ensure that the following columns are displayed:
• Distance to Plan
• Toolface (HS) to Plan
• Y Offset to Plan
• X offset to Plan
3. Open Travelling Cylinder View and Ladder View Plots
4. Anticollision Settings:
• In the Range to Results section, select the Last “x” Survey

Stations option and enter the number of surveys you are
interested in.
• In the Distance After field, enter the depth interval after the last
survey station, in which surveys are to be projected to.
• Select Center Distance and enter a value. This defines the
diameter of the Travelling Cylinder plot.
• Select Offset Datum as this adjusts the vertical depths on offset
wellpaths by datum.
• Select Highside Toolface as this defines the direction from the
reference well to the offset well at the reported depth.
Note
Offset bearing will change to Highside automatically if the interpolated inclination

on the plan for the current survey depth is > 1 degrees. Otherwise it will show North
referenced TC plot. This change over angle is shown as the 3rd data field after
Survey Stations.

• Select Planned Design as this sets the planned design as the
reference design.
Note
When you select Planned Design, the columns, Distance to Plan, Toolface HS to Plan, Y
Offset to Plan, and X Offset to Plan, in the Survey Editor read “From Plan”.
5. In the Project Ahead dialog, select method of choice to project

ahead. There is an option to project ahead of the survey
calculations. These update when a survey station is added.
Generally, it’s recommended to project back to the plan for
complex trajectories, even if this is not immediately required.
Reference axes show a Traveling Cylinder plot based on the ‘bit face’
view from the plan. The diameter of the plot can change with depth and
is set with the anti-collision color bands. The ‘approved’ plan will be
used as the reference.

The Y axis is Highside, X axis is Left Right. When the well is inclined
(on the plan) then highside is used as reference. If the section of the plan
is vertical then North is used for the Y axis (X for east).
The position of the current survey point (and maybe previous stations to
show trend) will be plotted. A projection from the bit will be shown,
either a straight line for 100- 200’, or back on track to the plan.
Hardlines show ‘no-go’ lines based on compass anti-collision against

the plan of offset well. The hardline is a composite of the minimum
separation (SF=1.0) against all chosen wells radially 0-360 degrees. The
no-go lines are only computed for offset wells from the current survey
depth to the end of the projection.
The Travelling Cylinder and Ladder plots will update when a survey
station is added. Anti-collision is automatically recalculated for the
survey stations and projections.
6. Select only the Actual designs and not the plan on the same
wellbore in Offset Designs
Below is a suggested window layout when using the Well in a Tunnel

feature.

The Ladder plot is optional, but it complements the Traveling cylinder

plot.
Radioactive Source
A number of wellbores can have a Nuclear source left as a fish in the
hole, e.g. lost MWD tool. In practice these ‘fish’ are cemented back
(plugback) and sidetracked. It is important to avoid these fish, but it is
not normally required to avoid the depths above the cement plug (which
could go back to surface). The requirement is to run a special anti-
collision report or plots against these sections.
The Nuclear Source is configured in the following:
• Wellbore Properties dialog - define the depth at which the

radioactive source occurs
• Anticollision Settings dialog - configure Offset Wells with a

Radioactive Source specified, to be shown on plots only below
the depth at which the source has been specified. Otherwise, the
entire well path to surface will be displayed on plots.
• Offset Design Selection dialog - filter for any Wellbores that

have been specified as Radioactive.

The following plot shows a spider plot with two radioactive sources
(MFF19 OH – below 8000’md and MFB23 OH below 10,000’MD
highlighted in red).
The following shows a ladder view of the same reference versus the two
radioactive source wells.
The scan limit is set at 10,000 ft. Notice that the lines are continuous,
because the 3D scan shows the 3D distance from the depth in the
reference to the source. This could be an end point (start/end) of the

source. Therefore the convergence/ divergence is quite often 1:1 (45

degrees).
Pedal Curve Error Surface

The traveling cylinder plot provides a toolbar icon that enables a
statistically correct form of the combined error surface to be plotted
against the offset wellpaths. This error surface is known as a pedal
curve, also referred to as “footprint,” dumb-bell, or a peanut shape. This
shape is different from all other graphics within the COMPASS
software in which an ellipse(oid) or sphere(oid) is depicted.
The elliptical error surface is usually used to represent the positional

uncertainty of a point on a wellpath. This uncertainty can be described
mathematically by using a 3D covariance matrix which describes the
mathematical derivation of the dimensions and orientation of the
ellipsoid:
Sigma n, e, and v refer to the uncertainty in an earth-centered frame of

reference (north, east, and vertical).
The radius of the error ellipse in any direction does not represent the
positional uncertainty in that direction. Restricting the formulae to
horizontal uncertainty, the expression to calculate positional uncertainty
for any azimuth A is:

The resultant shape of this surface is a pedal curve. This shape can be
drawn from the standard error ellipsoid by drawing tangent lines in all
directions from the ellipsoid origin, and then drawing a set of
perpendicular opposing lines connecting the first point of contact of the
line onto the ellipse.
The following graphic displays how a pedal curve can be constructed from
the systematic error ellipse:
The pedal curve is essentially the combined ellipse distance (extremity

to extremity) plus in all directions. The traveling cylinder plot assumes
that you are not on the plan, and that you can approach the offset wells
in any direction. So the combined ellipse distance computed in the
previous COMPASS software is only in one direction; with Pedal
curves the no-go zones are determined for all directions (that is, 0-360)
about the reference and drawn on the offset. It is a better representation
of where you can go. Other limits are combined in the no-go zones, such
as casing diameters and arbitrary limits like 10 m, where configured. If
you use risk-based rules, you are no longer comparing ellipses, and the
pedal curve routine can draw weird shapes, such as butterflies.
Interactive Traveling Cylinder View

The Depth Slice toolbar icon ( ) activates the interactive traveling
cylinder view. The view switches to show offset data for a single depth
on the reference wellpath. The same functionality is available within the
3D Proximity view.
Using the scroll bar at the right side of the plot, you can change the
measured depth to any point along the reference wellpath. Similarly to
the 3D view, you can also use the keyboard controls and the Up, Down,

Page Down, Page Up, Home, and End buttons to move along the
reference wellpath.
For each measured depth, the COMPASS software plots the range and
orientation from high-side to the offset wells. In the bottom window, the
wellpath center-to-center distance and separation factor are displayed
for each offset wellpath. At any depth, if the ratio factor falls below one
of the company warning levels, that warning also appears.
The circle/ellipse around the offset well and reference wells represent
the error ellipse’s geometry at the current scan depth.
The following graphic depicts a traveling cylinder depth slice with

projected ellipse extents:
3D Proximity View
The 3D Proximity View provides both a three-dimensional graphic
representation of selected well paths and a tabulated list of anticollision

results. The graph is essentially a 3D live graph with additional tools

useful for anticollision assessment. For visual assessment, this graph is
very useful to quickly obtain a picture of what is happening relative to
the reference wellpath. For absolute anticollision assessment, the
Ladder view and Anticollision report provide a quicker method for
determining risk.
To Set Up a 3D Proximity Graph

1. Set the interpolation depths and scan limit in the Anticollision
Settings dialog box.
2. Select offset designs to be shown in the view.
3. Start the graph by selecting it from the menu.
The following is a list of the toolbar icons that are commonly used to assess
collision risk for the 3D Proximity view:
3D Proximity View Toolbar Icons

Click... To...
Project a shadow of the wellpaths onto the horizontal and both vertical
planes.
Replace the north and east walls with a vertical grid.
Display the depth plane at the current depth.
Display an ellipse down each wellpath indicating the positional error

at each point.
Interactive Scroll Bar

3D Proximity computes the distance between the reference wellpath and
selected offset wells for a given depth on the reference wellpath.
Use the vertical scroll bar at the side of the graphic to change the
reference wellpath depth. As you do so, the closest point on nearby wells,
which are marked with a cross, change. The positions of these markers
can change for different scan methods.

The wellbore center-to-center distance and separation factor are tabulated

for each offset well. The maximum separation reported is set in the
Anticollision Settings dialog box. No values reported for a particular
wellpath indicates that the calculated results fall outside your scan limits.
Helpful Hints
• Click and drag MB1 to rotate and tilt the 3D frame.

• Click and drag (up/down) MB3 to zoom in and out.
• Use the keyboard buttons to rotate, zoom, or step the wellpath point.
• To differentiate between wells, click each wellpath name in the legend
box.The wellpath is highlighted on the graphic.
• To adjust the radius of the depth plane, use the Anticollision Settings dialog
box and change the scan radius.
• Try not to rotate, zoom in, and zoom out too often, or too quickly. It is very
easy to become disoriented.
The following graphic depicts a 3D Proximity view:

Reports
To access the Reports dialog box:
• Click the toolbar ( ) icon.

• Select Report > Anticollision > Reports.
Select the Anti-collision check box to list the
anticollision reports. Deselect all other check boxes
to remove other types of reports from the list.
Reference Level displays

information that indicates what
reports are available.
Ellipse Separation Report

The anticollision report is a very quick and quantitative way to evaluate
collision risk for a number of offset wells. To generate this report, the
COMPASS software runs down the current well at intervals and
calculates the distance to each offset wellbore. The report consists of
Page Header, Report Header, Summary, and a Results section for each
offset wellbore.

To Set Up a Data Scan Report

1. Select offset designs for the scan.
2. Define the interpolation interval, range, and scan limit in the

3. To start the report, select Report > Anticollision > Reports. Select
the Anti-collision check box, and then select Anticollision Report
from the list.
Definition of Sections
Page Header
Printed at the top of each page, the page header contains the name of the
reference wellpath, date and time, and the page number. You can use
Report Setup under the Utilities menu to add display of Company and
User logos.
Report Header
The report header shows the parameters setup in interpolation interval
and the error model and warning method that are defined in Company
Properties.
Summary
The Summary section shows the point of minimum separation factor
between the reference and offset wellpaths. Because separation factor
considers the size of the wellpath error ellipsoid, the point of minimum
separation factor cannot coincide with the closest center-to-center
distance.

Results
The results section contains the following columns:
Report Results Section Columns

Column... Description...
Reference MD and TVD Columns 1 and 2 show the measured depth and
true vertical depth of the point on the reference
wellpath. These depths are referenced to the
drilling datum on the reference wellpath.
Offset MD and TVD Columns 3 and 4 show the depth of the nearest
point on the offset wellpath from the point on the
reference.
Note: The measured depth and vertical depth on
the offset wellpath are referenced to the drilling
datum of the offset wellpath. The result depends on
the Scan Method selected.
Major Semi-Axis Error Ref. Columns 5 and 6 are the ellipse of uncertainty
and Offset major semi-axis dimensions of the reference and
offset wellpaths. When you scan with 3D Closest
Approach or Traveling Cylinder separation, the
error quoted is the maximum radius of the error
ellipsoid in a plane perpendicular to the wellpath at
that point. When scanned by Horizontal Plane, the
error is the radius of the ellipsoid in a horizontal
plane. The size of the error depends upon surface
errors and survey tools assigned the current and
any parent wellpaths.
Orientation: AZI, TFO (HS) Orientation to set the reference wellpath to move
or TFO+AZI towards the nearest point on the offset wellpath.
The angle displayed depends on the anticollision
method chosen for this Company.
Closest Approach – TFO (HS) High-side toolface
angle.
Horizontal Plane – AZI – Azimuth angle from
reference point to offset well at the same vertical
depth.
Traveling Cylinder – TFO (HS) Highside toolface
in traveling cylinders plane.
Highside + Azimuth – TFO+AZI Toolface + the
current well azimuth.

.
Report Results Section Columns (Continued)
*North and East North and East are the coordinates of the offset
well at the depth of interest as they would appear in
a spider plot. The coordinates have been adjusted
to the origin for the reference well (Site or Slot).
Ctr to Ctr Distance Distance from the center of the reference wellpath
to the offset wellpath in the plane defined by the
anticollision method.
*Edge To Edge Distance Distance from the edge of the error ellipsoid
around the reference wellpath to the edge of the
error ellipsoid around the offset wellpath.
*Separation Factor The separation factor at that point. For a

description of separation factor, see warning
method. This column does not appear in “rules
based” anticollision.
Warning In Company Properties, you may enter text to be

printed on anticollision reports when a separation
factor threshold is passed. In “rules based”
anticollision, the warning “Passed” or “Failed”
appears for the appropriate rule for this wellpath.
The columns marked with an asterisk (*) do not appear on “rules based”
reports and are substituted with the following:
No Go Area The No-Go Area appears on “rules based” anticollision

reports. It is the combined distance from the offset
wellpath that must not be exceeded. It is the sum of the
combined errors (in the vector between the two wells), the
casing and hole radii, and the tolerance radius defined in
the rule.
Casing The casing diameter on the offset well.
Allowable Deviation The maximum distance that can be drilled from the plan
(from plan) in the direction of the offset wellpath. It is essentially the
Ctr-Ctr distance minus the No Go Area. In designing the
well plan, the allowable deviation value should not be
less than or equal to zero, or there will be no room to drill
the well.

Error Ellipse Report

The error ellipse report describes the geometry and orientation of the
uncertainty ellipse with depth along the reference design. The report is
a very useful way to assess how the ellipse geometry develops along the
design. The error ellipse is computed from parameters contained in the
survey tools assigned to the active design in the survey program editor.
To Set Up an Ellipse Survey Report

1. To generate an error ellipsoid around a wellpath, you must assign
tool codes to the design. To assign tool codes to an actual design, use
the Actual Design Properties dialog box. To assign tool codes to a
plan, use the Plan Design Properties dialog box.
2. State the interpolation interval and range for the ellipse data in the
3. To start the report, launch reports from the anticollision menu, and
then select Ellipse Survey Report from the available list.
Elipse dimensions
All ellipse dimensions reported are half-axes or radii, and not diameters
Definition of Columns
Ellipse Survey Section Columns

This column... Means this...
MD Measured depth
Incl Inclination
Azim Azimuth
TVD True vertical depth
Uncertainty Radius of the error envelope and its confidence level

is stated in standard deviations from the mean, as
noted in the header of the report

Ellipse Survey Section Columns (Continued)

Bias Amount the ellipse center is displaced from the
center of the wellpath
Bias is caused by error sources that have an
unbalanced distribution. For instance, magnetic
surveys often plot to the north of gyro surveys, due to
the earth’s magnetic field polarizing the drillstring in
a consistent direction.
High Side Uncertainty Semi-axis error in position on the high side of the
(cross borehole plane) hole (toolface 0/180)
High Side Bias Error in position lateral to wellbore
Lateral Uncertainty Semi-axis value of error lateral to wellpath in

horizontal plane (toolface 90/270)
Lateral Bias Lateral Bias component for the ellipse relative to the
direction of the wellpath
Vertical Uncertainty Semi-axis value in the vertical direction from the

wellbore depth
Vertical Bias Vertical Bias Component
Magnitude of Bias Total displacement of the ellipse from the center of

the borehole
Semi Major Uncertainty Largest dimension of the ellipse
Semi Minor Uncertainty Minor axis dimension
Semi Minor Azimuth direction of the horizontal minor axis from local
north
Tool Survey tool used to measure this survey station

The following graphic portrays parameters described within the Error

Ellipse Report:
Survey Bias
Survey Bias is the tendency for the most likely position of a wellpath, as
determined by the error model, to be different than its position as
calculated from survey data. This tendency is demonstrated when the
error model calculates an error surface that is not centered about the
wellpath trajectory. For example, magnetic surveys tools can have
azimuthal bias due to a systematic effect of drillstring magnetization.
Gyrocompass error can occur due to gimballing effects.
The following graphic demonstrates this concept. The wellpath to the

left displays Wolff and de Wardt error ellipses which are centered on the
trajectory calculated from the displayed survey stations. The wellpath to
the right displays ISCWSA error ellipses, which are offset to the
calculated trajectory. A dotted line displays the most likely trajectory
which passes through the center of the ellipses. The solid line displays

the calculated trajectory. “Most likely” is used as a description because

the error model is indicating that, statistically, the wellpath position
would be at the center of the error surface.
In the COMPASS software, Survey Bias is shown on all ellipse

drawings; however, the ISCWSA model is the only error model in the
COMPASS software that generates bias errors, so it is not observed on
Systematic Ellipse error surfaces.


Chapter 7
Survey Module
Overview
The Survey module calculates drilled wellbore trajectories from entered

survey data using the company-specified survey calculation method,
such as Minimum Curvature. The module can be used to enter
traditional survey data (MD, inclination, and azimuth), Inertial Survey
data (TVD, N, and E), and Inclination Only survey data (MD and
inclination). By using an assigned survey tool error model for each
survey, the wellpath positional uncertainty over the depth range of the
survey can be calculated and included in the actual wellpath and will be
used in anticollision calculations.
The main components of the Survey module are:
• Survey Properties
• Survey Import
• Survey Editor
• Project Ahead and Interpolate
• Target Confidence
• Survey Cost
• Quality Assessment tools
• Survey Analysis
• Survey Reports
• Survey Export
Properties is used to enter the survey tie-on point and assign a survey
tool. The Editor lets you type in survey measurements, compute the
wellpath trajectory, project ahead from any point to a target location,
depth on a plan, or calculate a trend by using existing survey data to a
MD or TVD. You can also interpolate points on the survey by either
MD, TVD, Inc., or Azi. Quality control tools enable you to check for
errors in the data that can be immediately corrected.

Chapter 7: Survey Module
Analysis tools enable you to create comparative T-plot charts as well as

assess survey data quality using graphs or reports. Survey Reports lets
you preview canned reports supplied with the COMPASS™ software.
Export tools enable survey data and almost all other data available
within the COMPASS software to be exported in a variety of
user-defined formats to a text file or the Windows® Clipboard.

Defining New Survey Properties
Before creating a new survey, check the Status Box to ensure you are
entering the survey into the correct company, project, site, well,
and wellbores.
To create a new survey, use one of the following two methods:
• From the menu bar, select File > New > Survey.
• Right-click on the wellbore name in the browser, and select

New Survey.
Naming and Specifying General Information About the Survey

The most important items in Survey Properties are the name, survey
tool, and tie-on point designation. An intuitive survey naming
convention should always be adopted and supported within a company
so that unfamiliar survey data can be easily recognized. Two good
recommendations are to include the hole size utilized by the survey tool,
as well as the tool name itself. Examples of easily recognizable survey
names are:
• 12-1/4” Sperry MWD

• 9-5/8” Finder Gyro (0hr)
• 13-3/8” Keeper Gyro in Csg
• 26” Totco
You can also enter description, company, and engineer details to

provide additional information about the survey, although entering this
information is optional. Company and Engineer fields are populated
automatically with your name and company name when a new survey
is created.

The following graphic depicts the New Survey > Survey Properties >
General tab:
Ensure that the survey is
given an intuitive name to
help other engineers
reference it.
Specify the dates that the

survey began and ended.
Select Inertial for
imported surveys that
Select the Survey Tool do not get
from the pull-down list. recalculated.
If the desired tool is not
Select Inclination
listed, use File >
Only for surveys with
Properties >
no azimuth column (for
Company > Survey
example, TOTCO).
Tools to define the
tool you want to use.
To prevent unauthorized
changes to the survey, select
the Survey is locked check
box to lock it.
For more information about this topic, see the online help.
Survey Tool Determines Error Radius During Anticollision
The survey tool you assign determines the error radius around the wellbore during
anticollision. If you do not specifically assign a toolcode, the COMPASS software
assigns the default survey toolcode to this survey.

Managing Survey Data
The Survey Editor is essentially an enhanced spreadsheet with built-in

survey calculation functionality. The spreadsheet enables surveys to be
easily edited and viewed. It forms an area from which additional tools
can be launched. If a Survey Editor is open, any live views highlight the
depth range of any survey data entered.
Some general rules apply to the Survey Editor:
• The first row, row 1, is the tie-in point that is defined in Survey
Properties and cannot be changed in the Survey Editor.
• The current MD (measured depth) must be greater than the

preceding MD.
• Inc (inclination) must be in the range 0-180 degrees.
• Azi (azimuth) must be in the range 0-360 degrees.
Using the Survey Editor

The Survey Editor is the data entry grid for manually adding or editing
survey stations. After you have entered or imported the survey, you
should save it immediately and then complete a Varying Curvature scan
to check for poor-quality surveys.
To access the Survey Editor, double-click the survey name in the Data
Viewer portion of the Status window. The Survey Editor automatically
displays when you create a new survey.

Use Project Ahead to project ahead to:

• see the existing directional trend.
• determine directional parameters to hit target.
• perform back-on track calculations to plan.
• perform look-ahead anticollision.
Interpolate the current

survey by MD, TVD,
Inc, or Azi.
If you press Enter

without typing in a new
MD, the COMPASS
software automatically
increments the MD.
If you are incrementing
from the first line, the
amount will be 100 ft
unless depth units are
meters, in which case it
is 30 m.
If you are incrementing When entering or editing
To delete a row, click the row
from subsequent lines, inclination-only surveys, the azimuth
number in the grid, and press
the additional MD is column is not available. It is assumed
Delete. To insert a row,
computed from the zero, and the North and East
highlight the row above which
previous two lines. coordinates are computed to be
you want to insert, and
vertical below the start point.
press Insert.
Using the Survey Editor Toolbar
Interpolate Adjust multiple survey stations
Save Import Survey Annotations Print Help
Undo and Redo Project

Ahead Close editor
Survey Properties WITSML Export WITSML Import

The Survey Editor toolbar has the following functions:
• Save – save the survey
• Undo – undo the last change
• Redo – reapply the last change
• Survey Properties – access the Survey Properties dialog box
• Import – import survey data
• Interpolate – interpolate surveys along the survey
• Project Ahead – determine if a path is on course to hit a target or

specific MD/TVD
• Survey Annotations – add comments or annotations to the survey
• WITSML Import – selectively transfer business objects from

another application into the EDM™ database using an XML
transfer file
• WITSML Export – export business objects (that is, survey

headers) from the current application to a WITSML transfer
file (XML)
• Adjust Multiple Survey Stations – access the Adjust Survey

dialog box
Use this dialog box to adjust survey data points (rows). You can
adjust the measured depth, inclination, and azimuth.
• Print – print the contents of the dialog box
Interpolating Surveys
Use the Point Interpolation dialog box to determine the survey position
and vector for depths that do not coincide with survey station depths.
You can enter as many points as you need into the interpolation grid at
a time. If the entered depth is above the tie-on depth of the survey or
plan, the definitive survey is interpolated. If the entered depth is below
the end of the survey, a straight line is projected to that depth beyond the
end of the survey.

To see the results, click the Notepad button at the bottom of the window.
The interpolated results can be printed, incorporated into another
document via the Windows Clipboard, faxed, or emailed.
The following graphic depicts the Survey Point Interpolation window:
Within the current survey, you can interpolate by MD, Inc, Azi, or
TVD. For each method, the other entry parameters plus N/S, E/W,
VSec, and DLS are calculated.
Highlight the desired row,

and click Create Target to
add interpolated survey
point as a target. The
target is added to the
File > Properties >
Project > Targets Editor.
Results are available in text format using the

Windows Notepad feature. The results may
be printed, copied to the Clipboard, or
sent/emailed to a colleague.
The Interpolation algorithm used is determined from the Calculation

method specified in Company Properties > Calc Defaults tab. This is
also true for the Definitive Wellpath Spreadsheet Interpolation tool and
the Casing, Formation, and Annotation editors.
Depending on the calculation method, you might get some unexpected

results. For example, Minimum Curvature uses the “great circle route”
between two survey stations. If the first station was at 1 degree
inclination with heading due north and the second survey station had
1 inclination degree due south, Minimum Curvature would track the
path going under itself (around the sphere), hence the point halfway
would have zero inclination. Radius of curvature tracks the path going
around the cylinder (like a spiral), so all intermediate points would have
the same inclination, and azimuth would go 0 to 180. But Minimum
Curvature has the least overall angle change. You can prove the same
thing in planning using Dogleg/ Toolface to the same inclination—the
interpolated inclinations will dip in the middle; whereas the Build/Turn
equivalent will maintain a constant inclination.

Project Ahead
Project Ahead is a very useful tool to determine whether a wellpath
currently being drilled is on course to hit a target or project to an MD or
TVD using a set of directional drilling parameters. If the wellpath is off
course, Project Ahead can be used to determine how to get the wellpath
back on track to a plan or directly to a target. Directional drilling
parameters for both rotary and steerable drilling assemblies can
be determined.
The projection is made from the open survey plus the initial hold length.
If stations are added to the survey, the projection recalculates from the
end of these stations. If anticollision is currently being used, the
projection is included in the current anticollision scan to enable look
ahead anticollision.

The following graphic depicts the Project Ahead window:
Results are available in text format using

Project Ahead to an the Windows Notepad feature. These The target aiming point
object: results may be printed, copied to the can be adjusted laterally
Clipboard, or sent/emailed to and vertically.
• Target a colleague.
• Formation
• Plan
... or calculate a user-
defined projection using:
• Dogleg/Toolface
• Build/Turn
• Trend calculated
from survey
Enter values here for the

projection, depending on
the selected method.
The Projection Steps grid

displays the results
(below) and the trajectory
determined for the
hold section.
Specify Initial Hold Length to apply a hold or calculate a trend for this Click Calculate to
length before computing doglegs to hit the targets or define the trend. calculate and observe the
Whether projecting to a target or a free projection, you can apply an projection steps.
initial hold section to represent the already drilled wellbore behind the
bit. This is especially useful when you consider that the survey
instrument can be 50 ft or so behind the bit. The COMPASS software
enables you to include a hold section with a 0.0 degree dogleg through
this interval, or a trend can be calculated from adjacent survey data.
This section is included in the Projection Steps grid.

Project Ahead can operate in one of two ways:
Use the... If you want to...
Project To Target, Plan, Specify the required location and let the
or Formation COMPASS software compute the trajectory
changes using one of the trajectory types. If a plan
has been selected, it shows the actions required to
take the wellpath back to the plan. This also works
for dipping formations.
User Defined Projection – Specify the projection distance to an MD or TVD

Curve Only and the curve rates, and then let the COMPASS
software compute the new location.
Two other areas in the window complete the dialog box. The parameter
entry area enables you to enter MD, TVD, Dogleg/Toolface, and
Build/Turn values as required by the projection method. The results grid
displays the directional drilling parameters of one or more
projected sections.
Projecting To Target, Plan, or Formation

The following graphic depicts the Project to Target or Plan Area within
Project Ahead window:
Select a target, formation, or Select a target from the list that is
plan that is defined within the currently associated with the
current wellpath. current wellpath.
If projecting to a target, override the

Choose a wellpath projection type. target’s aiming point by selecting a
new location vertically or laterally
using the Target Landing
Adjust feature.

To use the Project to Target, Plan, or Formation option, do

the following:
1. Select the object to which to project:
• Target – Select a target from the target list, or enter a point to

which to aim. If you do not see the required target on the list, you
have not allocated it to the wellpath list. When a target is
selected, the tabular display updates and shows the requirements
to hit five extremity points on the target for Curve Only, or
displays the projection sections for Curve-Hold and
Optimum Align.
Projecting to a target enables the use of the Landing Point adjust
feature in the Target Viewer. Click Landing and the Target
Viewer displays, which enables you to select any point to which
to project.
• Plan/Formation – Select the plan or the formation into which to

steer. This method not only returns the wellpath back to the plan,
but it also directs the well so that it aligns with the correct
inclination and azimuth.
2. Choose the wellpath projection type to get to the point:
• Curve Only projects a single curve to the target or plan point

through continuous steering. The COMPASS software
calculates the dogleg required for the projection.
• Curve + Hold can be used for slant wells and sidetracks where
the intercept point is close to the target. Curve + Hold adds two
sections. The curve gets you aimed at the plan/formation and
then holds until it has been hit. While this method returns you to
a point on the planned wellpath, it does not align you with the
direction and inclination of the plan.
Curve + Hold requires the dogleg severity for the curve to be

entered in the following parameter fields. If parameter field
information is not entered, a Projection Warning window
displays to explain that it is not mathematically possible to
project to the required point.
• Curve + Curve uses two single curved section without a

tangent section.

• Optimum Align is best applied to horizontal wells, where full

steering control is possible. Optimum Align adds three
sections—curve / hold / curve. This not only returns you to the
planned wellpath, but, when you select the plan you are on, the
planned inclination and correct azimuth display at that point.
This projection also requires the dogleg severity for the two
steered sections to be entered.
• Ouija Board modifies the current Project Ahead view to allow

calculation of two of the following parameters when you enter
the other two:
— final inclination
— final azimuth
— dogleg
— toolface angle
3. Set the measured depth you want to reach in the plan and the dogleg
severity to use in steering. If you specify a measured depth that is
too short to reach the plan, the program cycles depths in 10 ft (5 m)
increments until the plan can be reached.
4. After all parameters are defined, click Calculate to generate the

Projection. Depending on what has been requested, one or more
rows appear in the results grid. Projections to targets can display
parameters to hit different points on the target, projection, or
projections to user-selected aiming points. Curve + Hold and
Optimum Align projections display section details. All rows in the
results grid display the Build/Turn rate required for rotary drilling
assemblies; Dogleg/Toolface required for steerable assemblies; and
the projected point, including MD, TVD, Inc, Azi, N, E, and Vsec.
The following graphic depicts the Project Ahead results for Optimum
Align to Target results:

The Projection Steps results grid also displays the directional

parameters calculated for the hold section, whether hold or calculated
for trend. This information is very useful to a directional driller who
includes the information when setting up their tools for a slide.
Click the Notepad icon in the toolbar to make projection details

available as a text file that can be shared with other engineers.
If the object projected to is a target and the projection is Curve Only, the
COMPASS software displays a number of projections to hit different
locations on the target.
The following graphic depicts the Project Ahead results for Target for
Curve Only:
You can interact using the live views and the different projected
sections. Clicking a row in the results grid causes that projection to be
displayed in all live views.
Using the User-defined Projection, Curve Only

User-defined projections enable “what if” type projections to be
completed to a MD or TVD through continuous steering only. For rotary
drilling assemblies, you can define Build and Turn rates; for steerable
drilling assemblies, you can define a Dogleg and Toolface Orientation.
To determine if a wellpath is on course to a target or other location, a
trend can be established from a number of existing surveys to a MD
or TVD.

The following graphic depicts the User Defined Projection in Project

Ahead window:
1. Select the depth to which to project:
• MD specifies measured depth.
• TVD specifies vertical depth.
• Ouija Board modifies the current Project Ahead view to allow

calculation of two of the following parameters when the user
enters the other two:
— final inclination
— final azimuth
— dogleg
— toolface angle
• Avoid Wells uses the Dogleg/Toolface to MD projection type.

This projection type determines the best toolface angle to avoid
offset wells you have selected. You must specify the projection
MD and dogleg severity.
Depths must be entered into the following parameter entry fields.

2. Select the projection type:
• Build/Turn specifies the Build and Turn Rate (for

rotary drilling).
• Dogleg/Toolface specifies the Dogleg Rate and Toolface

Orientation (for steering drilling).

• Constant Toolface results in constant dogleg and constant

toolface through the turn.
• Trend Over Last applies the specified trend over a number of

previous survey points (to continue the current trend) or Hold for
a given Bit-Survey tool distance. You can enter the number of
survey points to construct the trend directly, or use the up/down
arrows to change the number of points.
3. Enter the necessary projection parameters highlighted in the

following line, then click Calculate.
The results grid populates and any live views are updated to display the
projected section.
The following graphic depicts the COMPASS 3D view displaying

Project Ahead Curve+Hold from a survey ending at circular target T1
projecting ahead to rectangular target T10:

Survey Data Quality

One of the more useful tools in the COMPASS software enables you to
check for errors in the survey data. With the large amount of survey data
typical of modern surveys, it is very difficult to visually assess whether
any errors are present and, if they are, where they are located.
Unfortunately, survey errors are very common because of a number of
reasons, including:
• typing/communication (language) problems

• inconsistent interpretation of survey measurements
• bad individual survey
• survey tool operating incorrectly
• survey tool run badly
• incorrect tie-on points
Because of the large source of errors and potentially serious

consequences, every survey should be checked. Ideally, each company
should have some form of survey quality control procedure in place to
ensure that these errors are detected. Remember, the surveyor should be
checking for errors, too.
You can assess the quality of the survey data by using Input Validation
to check for high doglegs, or by using the more rigorous Varying
Curvature method, which checks for the individual effect that each
survey observation has on the calculated bottomhole location.
Both tools allow you to determine the depth of any suspect points that
can be fed back to the surveyor for them to check.
Input Validation
The Input Validation is configured by using the Survey Properties >
Validation tab. When turned on, survey observation calculates dogleg
severities higher than the validation dogleg severity that are highlighted
in red. Remember, there are valid reasons for high local doglegs, such
as controlled directional drilling. For more information about specifying
validation criteria, see “Managing Survey Data” on page 7-5.

The following graphic depicts Input Validation in the Survey

Editor window:
6.11 deg/100 ft dogleg

highlighted in red.
With Input Validation on, the entire survey should be parsed to check
for suspect doglegs. If there is any question about a survey point, get the
surveyor to check it or delete the survey.
Importing Survey Data

The COMPASS software enables survey data to be imported from other
sources; for example, from the survey contractor at the rigsite or
directional drilling office. The Survey Import feature is one of the best
tools to reduce errors in the survey data entered into the COMPASS
software by eliminating the potential for typing mistakes when survey
readings are re-entered. It is designed to be flexible and easy to use.
To import survey data, click the toolbar icon.
To import survey data, you must know exactly how the survey data is
formatted in the source data location. Normally, the COMPASS user
would agree to a format with the surveyor/contractor, or the operator can
simply dictate exactly what the format should be.

Whatever the data location or format, COMPASS survey data import

reads only the data from rows in the source location that have the correct
format. Any rows in the source location that do not have the exact
specified format are ignored. This is quite useful, because other parties
can include survey header information, such as column titles and units,
or other notes about the survey data that is passed over during the
import process.
Survey Types
The COMPASS software is capable of importing different types of
corrected and partially corrected survey data. The COMPASS software
can read in the survey observations and can apply minor corrections to
the data as it is imported.
Different types of surveys that can be imported are:
Normal Survey
A Normal Survey consists of MD, Inclination, and Azimuth. From this
information, the COMPASS software computes the TVD, N/S, and 
E/W of each survey station. Use this method when importing three
values, such as:
MD Inc Azi
100 0.1 345.1
200 0.5 300.2
Inertial Survey
An Inertial Survey consists of six columns: MD, Inclination, Azimuth,
TVD, N/S, and E/W. The COMPASS software reads the coordinates
(TVD, N/S, and E/W) of each survey station. MD, Inclination, and
Azimuth are not back calculated. Use this method when importing all
six values.
MD Inc Azi TVD N/S E/W
100 0.1 345.1 100 -2.5 5.5
200 0.5 300.2 200 -2.7 5.8

Inertial Survey - Calculate MD/Inc/Azi

An Inertial Survey - Calculate MD/Inc/Azi survey consists of three
columns: TVD, N/S, and E/W. The COMPASS software reads the
coordinates (TVD, N/S, and E/W) of each survey station and back
calculates the MD, inclination, and azimuth using a method consistent
with Minimum Curvature. If the standard import results in erratic
inclination and azimuth, use the Spline switch, which will compute
smoother angles using a three-point spline method. Use this method
when importing three values, such as:
MD N/S E/W
100 -2.5 5.5
200 -2.7 5.8
Inclination Only
An Inclination Only survey consists of two columns: MD and
Inclination. Other columns are ignored. The COMPASS software
imports the survey calculating the data as for an inclination reading
instrument (TOTCO). The azimuth is assumed to be zero, and N/S and
E/W are computed vertical below the start point. Use this method when
importing two values, such as:
MD Inc
100 1.50
200 1.75
SAG Correction
A SAG correction is a correction to inclination due to drill collar
bending (due to dogleg or weight) in the region of the measurement, so
that the collar angle is different to the hole angle. It relies on a
mechanical stiffness model for the lower BHA.

In this example, there is a very simple survey with a build to 90 degrees.
In the Drill String tab, the string is displayed.
Defines the distance from

the bit to the inclination
instrument center.
Required for the Calculate/Apply SAG will apply the

Check to apply azimuth deflections
buoyancy of the changes to the survey. You may see
to the survey. This only happens in
collars. changes of up to 0.2 degrees in
sections where there is azimuth
angle change (and where inclination inclination. There will be very small
is non vertical). changes in the inclination plot, and
zooming is required to see the
differences.
There is very limited editing capability for the string using the Drill
String tab. If you have a license to WELLPLAN™, you can edit the
survey using it, or you can use Select/Edit Case to select a
WELLPLAN™ case.
The SAG/BHA Deflection plot displays the effect. The red line indicates
the position of the collar at that distance from the bit, relative to the

center of the hole. It is shown on a diameter (inches) scale. The red

dashed line is the angle (degrees) on the inch scale.
The graph below displays a typical horizontal BHA in 8.5” hole, with 2
stabilizers at 2.5’ and 34’, and slick collars above that. The MWD sensor
is at 45’ indicated by the broad green line (chosen to maximize the SAG
effect). The black line indicates the maximum deflection of the collar
stabilizer (clearance) at that distance from the bit. This graph shows the
BHA condition at the last depth in the survey. In this case the depth is
2250’ and inclination is 90 degrees and the curvature is zero. The model
will include curvature, but only from the last survey interval.

Sliding Sheet and SAG Calculation

Create a new survey.
This procedure can be applied to existing surveys if they are unlocked.

Entry of the survey name is required. All other data will be defaulted.

Click the Apply Survey

Correction button.
On the Load Survey tab, select a survey to load and correct. This
process can be applied to a copy of the survey. The corrected survey can
be saved without interfering with the original survey. Once the survey is
loaded, graphs will appear in the graph window.

Slide Correction
On the Slide Sheet tab, enter the depths and intervals for sliding (non-
rotating string)

Enter the Start MD for the interval. Check the Sliding box if the tool is
oriented and will generate maximum dogleg. Do not check the Sliding
box if the string is rotating, and it will assume there is zero dogleg.
Click Calculate/Apply Slide to apply the correction to the survey.

Before and after surveys are shown below. The slide intervals are
inserted into the survey as interpolated depths. Straight, dogleg sections
are applied depending on whether sliding or rotating. Notice the sharp
doglegs in the corrected survey.
After
Before

The Survey Correction graph displays Inclination, Azimuth and

Dogleg Severity for corrected and un-corrected surveys.
Click for label and zoom options.
Use the tool bar icons to select what
you want to display on the graph.
Click to save
the corrected
survey.
Indicates sliding and rotating intervals.

Analyzing Survey Data
Using Varying Curvature

Select Survey > Data Analysis > Varying Curvature to access the
Varying Curvature Setup dialog box.
Varying curvature is used to check survey data quality. Varying

curvature considers the effect on the calculated bottomhole location of
each survey point by removing each point from the survey and
recalculating the trajectory. For each station, the calculated result is
called inconsistency—this is the distance the calculated bottomhole
location would move if a survey observation were removed, and this
value is expressed as a percentage of the adjoining survey’s depth
interval. For example, if the measured depth interval of your survey
stations is 100 ft, and the removal of an observation moves the
bottomhole location by 5 ft, then the inconsistency value of that
observation is 5%.
The following graphic depicts the Varying Curvature algorithm:

To help filter out suspect observations, a Tolerance limit can be defined

to essentially provide a Quality Control level. Any observation above
this tolerance is plotted in red and summarized on the Varying
Curvature report.
As a general rule, any observations with an inconsistency greater than

2% are suspect. However, good-quality survey data with a very low
mean inconsistency can show suspect inconsistencies much lower
than 2%.
Access the Varying Curvature tools by selecting Survey >

Data Analysis from the COMPASS menu bar. When accessed, a choice
window appears. You can review a varying curvature report, launch a
2D Varying Curvature graph, or launch a 3D Varying Curvature graph.
The following graphic depicts the Varying Curvature dialog box:
Define the quality level to be

highlighted in graphs or
appear in reports.
Varying Curvature Analysis options:

• Produce a graph of combined
inconsistency for each survey station
• Produce a graph of inconsistency split into
its vertical and horizontal components
Using the 2D Varying Curvature Graph

The 2D Varying Curvature graph plots total inconsistency against
measured depth of the survey. It is an easy graph to interpret. Look for
irregular spikes in the data, read off the depth of the spike using the line
data reader, and then check the survey observation data at that point.
These graphs are live, so you can move the Survey Editor to see both
editor and graph, update the observation in question, and immediately
assess whether the correction has removed the spike.

The following graphic depicts an example of a 2D Varying

Curvature graph:
Use the Line Data Reader to see

survey station details of any suspect
points within the survey.
Despite being below the 2% threshold, you should

check the survey measurements on both of
these stations.
The preceding example displays two suspect points. Even though their
inconsistency is well below the tolerance, both of these points should be
checked with the survey contractor. It could be that these survey stations
were reported incorrectly or were incorrectly recorded by the
survey hand.
3D Varying Curvature Graph

The 3D Varying Curvature graph separates inconsistency into its
vertical (high/low) and horizontal (left/right) components and plots it
against measured depth of the survey. Spikes in the high/low side graph
are mainly due to errors in inclination. Spikes in the left/right are mainly
due to errors in azimuth.

The following graphic depicts 3D varying curvature graphs:
likely inclination error likely azimuth error
The preceding example displays the two suspect points as an error in

inclination at 1,496 ft, and an error in azimuth at 2,923 ft. With this
information, you could contact the survey hand to check the inclination
and azimuth at these depths and request a report back if the survey
requires a correction.
Using Graphs to Analyze Survey Data

Analysis graphs enable the production of comparison plots of survey
and plan data. For example, you can plot MD against inclination or
azimuth or plot dogleg severity against wellbore inclination to see how
well the directional driller is controlling direction as he builds angle.
Multiple surveys can be overlaid to compare different surveys within the
same hole section, plot planned trajectories against actual, or assess
survey variation against that defined by the survey tool error model.

A comparison of dogleg against MD can indicate areas of possible

casing wear or indicate locations where keyseating can occur. Similarly,
a comparison of dogleg against TVD can indicate which formations
were difficult to drill.
Two options are available: Min/Max graph or Analysis Graphs.
Max/Min View
You must have a survey open to gain access to the Max/Min view. The
Max/Min view displays two graphs:
• inclination against measured depth
• azimuth against measured depth for the entire measured depth

range of the current survey
Additionally, the title area details the range of inclinations and azimuths
present in the survey data. This graph can be useful as a first quality
control check on survey data. However, Varying Curvature scan offers
a more rigorous method of identifying poor survey data.
Analysis Graphs
To create analysis graphs, open the survey you want to plot, and then
select Survey > Data Analysis > Analysis Graphs.
The next step depends on the type of analysis you require. You have a
choice of two types of graph selection. The COMPASS software has
several commonly used predefined formats, mainly against measured
depth. In addition, user-defined plot formats can be generated.

The following graphic depicts the predefined survey analysis graphs

dialog box:
Select parameters to cross-plot

from pull-down lists.
Select canned
comparisons
(Predefined) or define
your own formats
(User Defined)
You can choose to cross plot as many graphs as you like at a time, but
the number of graphs is realistically limited to the amount of vertical
resolution required. If you have too many graphs, any change in the data
in the graph can be difficult to see and interpret.
Like all COMPASS graphs, analysis graphs come supplied with the
usual toolbar icons. They can be printed or viewed with Print Preview to
see what would be sent to the printer.
Plotting Multiple Surveys

Additional surveys can be included in an existing graph for comparison
purposes. For example, you may want to compare survey tool results
over the same section of wellbore to see if the extra time running a Gyro
survey was well spent.
To access additional surveys, click the toolbar icon.

The following graphic depicts an analysis graph crossplot displaying

comparative survey data:
The preceding example is taken from the COMPASS training course.

The plot displays two surveys—an Electronic Multi-shot (EMS) survey
and a series of conventional SRG single shots—run over the same
depth interval.
The top inclination graph shows that the well profile is build, hold, and
drop—an S-well. It also shows no real difference between the two sets
of survey data. On inclination, at least, the two surveys agree.
The second azimuth graph shows that the well is being turned slightly to
the right through the build section, and then roughly holds direction until
the end of the survey. Looking at the survey data, you can see that as the
well builds angle, the surveys start to disagree, and that it is the magnetic
data that is displaying a higher azimuth. When the inclination starts to
drop, you can see that the magnetic data drops back into line with the
single shot gyro data. This type of behavior suggests that the magnetic
data is subject to some form of inclination-driven interference that is not
affecting the Gyro readings—possibly the survey tool has been poorly
located and is being affected by drill string magnetization.
Alternatively, you can see the sudden shift in the trend of the gyro data
at 1,500 ft and say that it is suspect from that depth. Whatever the
reason, the graph clearly shows a difference in the survey readings, and
further investigation is required.

Relative Instrument Performance

Expected measurement errors for inclination and azimuth axes may be
displayed on the analysis graphs by clicking the Error Bars icon ( )
on the toolbar or in graphic options. The quality of overlapping surveys
can be determined by evaluating the actual inclination and azimuth
differences against their expected performance shown by the error bars.
The error bars on survey analysis graphs are a combination of the errors
on both the reference survey and the survey chosen for comparison
(using RSS addition of independent sources of error). The size of the
error bars is determined from the confidence level chosen for the output
errors are at sigma field in the Customer Properties dialog box.
The following graphic displays a relative instrument performance:
Select icons to see how the survey tool These graphs compare surveys, so
performed against its defined at least one additional survey
error model. needs to be selected to see
any results.
The preceding graph compares the SRG and EMS surveys. Looking at
the Delta Inclination data, a considerable variation exists between the
two surveys; however, no trend can be observed between them. When
comparing against the expected variation due to error, the variation is
greater than expected for the tool error models and the confidence level
defined within the company.
The Delta Azimuth graph displays a clear trend between the two
surveys, which again highlights that one of the surveys is being affected
by some physical effect which is not affecting the other survey. Survey
errors are almost within their expected margins.

Survey Reports
The Reports functionality within the COMPASS software provides a

flexible, easy to use, survey/directional well planning reporting
mechanism suitable for all users of directional drilling software. Several
survey reports are available.
Survey reports are accessed from the main Survey menu or by clicking
the icon in the COMPASS toolbar. The reporting functionality is
available whether a survey is open or not. If a survey is not open, the
report details the design wellpath. If a survey is open, the data is for the
open survey.
The following graphic depicts the Report dialog box:
Select one or more

filters to view the All reports can be
selected type of report. previewed and
printed in a
professional
format, or they
can be output to a
text file.

Survey Export
The COMPASS software can export a survey, a plan, or a definitive

survey in any ASCII format.
Exporting a survey
The Survey Editor must be open for a survey to be exported. If a survey is not open,
the open design is exported.
The following graphic depicts the Export Survey window: (The same
dialog box is used to export plans.)
Select User Defined to specify export

format details.
Data can be exported to a file format

available from a pick-list. Format files
can constructed by clients.
Select to include the final driller’s

depth (TD) at the end of
the interpolations.
The output can be directed to a file or to the

Windows Clipboard for pasting into a word
processor, spreadsheet, or the Windows Notepad.
When exporting to paste into an Excel spreadsheet,
you should set the column delimiter to Tab.

Export File Format

You can export using a predefined format or you can define your own
format. If you use a predefined format, you can specify some
information be excluded in the export.
Exporting to a User-defined Format

If you want to use a User-defined format, select the User Defined
option. You must then specify:
1. Units – Select the units for depth, inclination, and azimuth from the
associated pull-down lists.
2. Column Delimiter – Select the option associated with the delimiter

you want to use. When exporting to paste into an Excel
spreadsheet, you should set the column delimiter to Tab.
3. Interpolate – Specify interpolation details. In user-defined exports,

an interpolation type may be defined. When interpolations are
requested, the original survey intervals are discarded in favor of
interpolated stations at regular intervals.
• Interpolate Interval – Enter the depth frequency to interpolate

the survey.
• Specify Depths by – Select measured depth (MD) or true

vertical depth (TVD).
• Range – Enter the start depth and end depth to clip

the interpolations.
• Include Station at End – Select this check box to attach the last
recorded station to the end of the interpolations.
• Whole Path – If a survey is open, select the Whole Path check

box to include the definitive path above the tie-on point when
you export the open survey.
Exporting to a Predefined Format

The COMPASS software allows you to configure export file formats.
The format files (*.cef) are placed in the COMPASS\CONFIG
directory. A pull-down list containing the different formats available is
listed in the export dialog box.

Custom export formats can be used for a number of reasons:
• quick export to a spreadsheet with various data

• formats for geological or geophysical applications
• exports to other engineering applications
• preview of data in Notepad to view, cut, and paste
If requested, Landmark® can supply formats for a number of third-party

applications or assist with the development of new format
configuration files.
If you want to use a predefined format, select the Pre-Defined Format

option. Select the format you want to use from the pull-down list. Items
that are included in this format become active and selected by default. If
the item is selected, it will be included in the export. If you do not want
to include the item, deselect the associated check box.


Chapter 8
Plots
Overview
The COMPASS™ software has two types of graphics:
• live graphs
• wall plots
Comparing Live Graphs and Wall Plots
Live Graphs
Live graphs or views are primarily designed for on screen viewing. This
type of graph can be output to a printer or exported to a file; however,
the flexibility of live graphs is inferior to wall plots. You can use live
graphs at any time to view your work. These graphs are termed live
because they are online and are updated automatically as data is changed
in the editors or data entry windows.
You can print a live graph using the toolbar icon. However, a better
method is to use the Print Preview feature by selecting File >
Print Preview. The Print Preview window displays the formatted
changes and uses the actual printer driver to present the graph in the
window. This view enables you to see exactly what will be printed
before you print it to hard copy.
The live graphs can display different types of wellpath data. In addition
to the definitive path (default color = blue), live graphs display:
• currently open survey (default color = red)

• currently open plan (default colours = red and green)
• Survey Project Ahead sections (default color = green)
• other wellpaths in the field using offset wells

Chapter 8: Plots
Examples of live graphs are:
• 3D view
• Vertical Section view
• Plan view
• Target Viewer
• Template Viewer
• Wellpath Optimiser view
• Anticollision plots
Wall Plots
Wall plots are designed for printer or plotter output. You can configure
a wall plot in many ways, as you will see later in this chapter. For
presentation output, use wall plots because live graphs are not
WYSIWYG (What You See is What You Get). All live graphs are
formatted as they are sent to the printer.

Chapter 8: Plots
Using Live Graphs
Accessing Live Graphs
Live Graphs Common to All Modules

Access live graphs common to all COMPASS modules by clicking the
following toolbar icons:
• 3D View ( )
• Section View ( )
• Plan View ( )
• Template Viewer ( )
• Target Viewer ( )
• Optimiser Viewer ( )
Live Graphs in the Survey Module

Access live graphs in the Survey module by selecting:
• Survey > Data Analysis > Min/Max Graph

• Survey > Data Analysis > Varying Curvature
• Survey > Data Analysis > Analysis Graphs
Live Graphs in the Anticollision Module

Access live graphs in the Anticollision module by selecting:
• Anticollision > Travelling Cylinder View

• Anticollision > Ladder View
• Anticollision > Separation Factor View
• Anticollision > 3D Proximity View
• Anticollision > Spider View - Local
• Anticollision > Spider View - Map

Chapter 8: Plots
Customizing Live Graphs

Use the General Graph Setup dialog box to configure the appearance of
live graphs. Access the General Graph Setup dialog box by:
• selecting Tools > Graph Setup.
• clicking the Graph Setup toolbar icon ( ).
Current Track Identification

To help distinguish different trajectories on a graph, you may assign
different colors and symbols to Definitive Survey, Current Survey, and
the current plan. You cannot assign a symbol to Targets.
Offset Track Colors

You may assign colors only for offset information, including offset
wellbores, offset surveys, and offset plans.
Multicolor
In the options for the Offset Wellbores, Surveys, and Plans, you may
select Multi to assign a different color to each new track.
Color by Type
In the options for Offset Wellbores, you may choose a pen color based
on the type that is defined in the Wellbore Properties dialog box. The
colors are assigned to Wellbore types in the Company Properties >
Wellbore Types tab.

Chapter 8: Plots
Sizes (% of the Window)

Text in this category does not change size as you enlarge the view. Font
sizes are shown as a proportion of the window size; so, when you change
the window size, the font sizes also change.
Sizes (% of the Graph)

Text in this category changes size as you enlarge the view. Font sizes are
shown as a proportion of the graph size. When you change the window
size, the font size does not change. Also, when there are multiple graphs
on a plot, such as an analysis, plot symbols and data labels are scaled to
the area occupied by each individual graph and not the overall
window size.
Why Is Size Based On % of Window or % of Graph?

When you enlarge graph details using zoom, some text is enlarged,
while other text is unchanged. This occurs because enlarging the titles
and axis labels gives a clear indication that the view has been magnified.
On the other hand, when you zoom in to magnify detail, you do not want
to make symbols, depth labels, and casing shoes too large to read.
Symbol Spacing
The frequency (number of stations) symbols are to be plotted along
a wellbore.
Background
Selecting this check box causes the graphs to display on a black
background. Black lines will appear as white lines.
Black background color
Setting the background color to black does not affect the printed versions of
the graphs.

Chapter 8: Plots
Using the Live Graph Toolbar Icons

Each live graph has its own set of properties and tools, but there is a
common subset of tools. The following graphic depicts the COMPASS
Live Graphs toolbar icons:
Online Help
• Launch the online help to see the tips available

for the current graph
Close
Print Live View
• Turn off the graph
• Format, and then send graphic to printer
Graphics Offset Wells
Display Definitive Wellpath
• Select Offset Wellpaths to include
in current plot
• Turn Definitive Wellpath On/Off
Zoom Out
Zoom In
• Click to pan out to original scale
• Click area to zoom in on
Rescale Axis
Line Data Reader
• Drag mouse pointer to reduce graph area
• Read X and Y axis values on a selected point
along line
• Move mouse to a select point
Point Data Reader
• Read X and Y axis values from selected point on graph

• Read Delta X and Y between two points on graph
Symbols
• Turn on line symbols for black

and white printing
• Helps differentiate lines on plot
Axis at (0,0) On/Off
• Major grid axis displayed in center or to left of plot Display Error Surface
Formations
• Display ellipse of uncertainty
along wellpath
• Display Formation Tops
• Ellipse interval may be adjusted
Display Casing Shoes in graphic options
• Display casing shoe symbols and • Ellipse is projected onto viewing
labels along wellpath and offset wells surface
Grid On/Off
Display Targets
• Turn grid lines on or off
• Include Wellpath targets in plot • Useful to turn off grid lines on black and white plots
Vertical Section Lines
Horizontal Section Lines
• Display vertical section lines in plan
• Display horizontal section lines in plan
Data Labels On/Off
Axis Labels On/Off
• Turn display of data labels on or off
Graphics Options • Turn display of axis labels on or off
• Access to all Live View/Wall Plot

Customizations or simply double-click on graph
Activate these additional tools and settings by clicking the icon. The
appearance of the graph can change, or an additional window can
appear. The most useful feature is the online help available for each type
of graph. Each graph type has its own subset of tools to manipulate the
plot and graphic options to customize the plot.

Chapter 8: Plots
Some additional icons appear on certain graphs.
Legend Dialog Box

When you launch a live graph, a Legend dialog box opens that contains
a list of all wellpaths displayed on the current view.
To change the wellpath color or

symbol, double-click it and choose
from the list.
The selected wellpath line will be

highlighted in bold on all live views.
The Legend dialog box has the following features to help you
distinguish different wellpaths:
• The first wellpath is always the current Definitive Wellpath.
• If you open a survey or a plan, it is next in the list.
• The next line is a blank line.
• The other lines in the Legend dialog box contain additional

offset wellpaths.
• Clicking a wellpath name in the Legend dialog box highlights its

trace in the graphic view.
• Clicking the blank line unhighlights all wellpaths.
• Double-clicking the name of each offset wellpath changes its color

or symbol.
To change the color of the current wellpath or survey, see “Customizing

Live Graphs” on page 8-4.

Chapter 8: Plots
Using the 3D View

One of the most commonly used live graphs, the 3D view quickly
enables you to obtain a good overall perspective of wellpath trajectory
entered in the COMPASS software.
Two types of tools are available:
• keyboard quick keys

• toolbar icons

Chapter 8: Plots
The following graphic depicts the keyboard quick keys and

toolbar icons:
Icon Function
Project the well paths onto a horizontal plane, a vertical plane

running East/West, and a vertical plane running North/South.
Replace the North and East walls with a vertical grid that follows
the trajectory of the wellpath.
Show all the targets in the site when the option is selected.
Show the focal point of the view. This is also the point of rotation.
The 3D solids view allows for enhanced viewing of error ellipse

for anti-collision analysis. 3D representation of offset wells, error
ellipses, targets, casings, and formations can all be displayed on
this view. View settings include options to control the detail,
transparency, and rendering of objects included in the view.
Icon Function
Rotate view
Tilt view
Zoom
With enabled:
Icon Function
Move along the wellpath in small steps
or

Chapter 8: Plots
Move along the wellpath in large steps
Move to the top of the wellpath
Move to the last point on the wellpath
With Space Bar pressed:
Icon Function
Slower rotation
Faster rotation
The 3D view is actually a 2D line drawing representation of 3D. When

zoomed out, perspective is easy; however, when you zoom in and start
rotating objects, it becomes difficult to keep your frame of reference. If
this occurs, zoom out, regain your perspective, rotate the object back to
where you think it should be, and zoom in again.
In addition to the keyboard, you can use MB1 to drag the 3D view and
MB3 to zoom in and out.

Chapter 8: Plots
Using the Vertical Section View

The Vertical Section view displays the current wellpath as projected
onto a vertical plane defined in Wellpath Setup. You can add additional
wellpaths to this plot, show target and casing details, and use the Line
Data Reader to select points on the wellpath.
Using the Plan View

The Plan view displays a horizontal projection of the wellpath. You can
display the current line of the vertical section from the origin to the end
of the wellpath.

Chapter 8: Plots
Using the Wall Plot Composer
The Wall Plot Composer is used to create and customize plot layouts for
windows, file, or professional hard copy output by creating a template
of the page layout that can be saved and reused. A wallplot consists of
any combination of graphical and data elements generated from the
COMPASS software, in addition to bitmaps or windows metafiles
constructed elsewhere. The only limitation is the amount of real estate
available on hard copy.
Accessing the Wall Plot Composer

Access the Wall Plot Composer by clicking the toolbar icon.

Chapter 8: Plots
Examining the Wall Plot Composer Components
The title bar indicates the name of the plot. This Rulers indicate the
plot has not been saved, so the name is still the location of the printable
default name of “New Plot.” The * indicates the page area, margins,
plot has been changed since the last save. and objects.
General toolbar
Object toolbar
Layout toolbar
This numeric
display indicates
the position of
the cursor.
The dotted blue line

indicates the
margin. You can
change the margins
by using the ruler.
Click the ruler where
the margin is and
move the
double-arrow cursor
to the new
margin location.
This section view and legend

are both objects. Objects have
The gray dots on the page indicate the
subobjects such as labels, grids, The white area is the
snap-to-grid settings that can aid with page. The solid gray line
lines, and text.
lining up objects on the page. indicates the printable
area of the page.
What is an Object?
An object is a graph, legend, text box, or other item that is added to a
Wall Plot Composer plot. Add objects by:
• selecting icons on the Object toolbar.

• selecting Composer > Add.
• using the right-click menu.

Chapter 8: Plots
Objects can be configured, resized, and customized in many ways. The

following objects can be added:
• XY Graph
• Traveling Cylinder graph
• 3D graph
• Data Box
• Geological Column
• North Arrow
• Legend
• Text
• Pictures
• Rectangles, Polygons, Ellipses, Circles, Lines, Segmented Lines,
Curved Lines, and Arrows
What is a Subobject?
Objects contain subobjects. Subobjects cannot be moved outside of the
object they are in. Examples of subobjects are:
• Lines
• Text
• Labels
• Grids
Setting Up the Wall Plot Composer Page

Use the Page Setup dialog box to specify the paper size, margins,
scaling, and layout for printing Wall Plot Composer plots. For more
specific information about the dialog box options, see the online help.

Chapter 8: Plots
Click the icon to access the Page Setup dialog box.
Use the scaling options to

convert a plot to a larger or
smaller sized paper.
Using the Toolbars

The Wall Plot Composer has the following three toolbars:
• General – The General toolbar is used for many functions,

including saving plots, zooming, configuring wall plot layout,
and printing.
• Object – The Object toolbar is used to select objects (plots, data,

arrow, legends, and so on) to place on the wall plot.
• Layout – The Layout toolbar is used to align the position of objects

on the wall plot and customize the grid.
For more information about this topic, see the online help.
Working With Wall Plot Composer Objects and Subobjects

Wall Plot Composer objects and subobjects can be configured,
customized, moved, and resized. You must select the objects or
subobjects that you want to change the appearance of before you can
change it. For a more complete explanation about objects and
subobjects, see “What is an Object?” on page 8-13 and “What is a
Subobject?” on page 8-14.

Chapter 8: Plots
Adding an Object to the Wall Plot

For more information, please see the online help.
1. Select the object you want to add to the wall plot. Use one of the
following three methods to add an object:
• Select the Object toolbar icons. If the toolbar icons are not
active, click anywhere on the Wall Plot page to activate them.
• Select Composer > Add.
• Select an object from the right-click menu. To use the right-click

menu, click anywhere on the Wall Plot page where there is not
already an object.
2. Using the mouse, place the crosshair cursor where you want one
corner of the object to be located. If you are adding an art object
(other than a circle or ellipse), see “Adding an Art Object to the
Wall Plot” on page 8-16. Use this procedure for circles and ellipses.
3. Click and hold MB1 as you define the size of the object.
4. Release MB1 when the object is the desired size.
Adding an Art Object to the Wall Plot

1. Select the art object you want to add to the wall plot. Use one of the
following three methods to add an art object:
• Select the Object toolbar icons. If the toolbar icons are not
active, click anywhere on the Wall Plot page to activate them.
• Select Composer > Add.
• Select an art object from the right-click menu. If you are adding
a circle or ellipse, see “Adding an Object to the Wall Plot” on
page 8-16. To access the right-click menu, click anywhere on the
Wall Plot page where there is not already an object.

Chapter 8: Plots
2. Using the mouse, place the crosshair cursor where you want the
starting point to be. Then, refer to the following:
• Lines – Click where you want to begin the line. Hold the mouse
button as you move the cursor to the end point. Release the
mouse button at the endpoint.
• Polygons – Begin as if you were drawing a line. To add another

segment to the line, click anywhere on the line, and hold the
mouse button as you move the cursor where you want the
segment to be. Release the mouse button. The last point will
automatically be joined to the first point.
• Polyline – Use the same procedure as for polygons except the

first and last points are not joined.
• Curved Lines – Use the same procedure as for polylines except

that the line segments are curved.
• Arrow – Use the same procedure as for lines except there is an

arrow head at one end of the line.
Selecting Objects on the Wall Plot

Click the black line outlining the object. The outline changes to
to indicate the object has been selected. To select more
than one object, press Shift as you select objects.
Selecting an Object Prior to Resizing, Moving, or Customizing
You must select an object before you can resize, move, or customize it.
Selecting Subobjects Within an Object on the Wall Plot

Select a subobject within an object by clicking the subobject. The
outline changes to to indicate the subobject has been
selected. To select more than one subobject, press Shift as you select
subobjects. To select all subobjects in a group, select the first subobject,
and then press Alt when you select the second subobject.

Chapter 8: Plots
Moving Objects or Subobjects on the Wall Plot

1. Select the objects or subobjects that you want to move. For
instructions about selecting objects or subobjects, see “Selecting
Objects on the Wall Plot” on page 8-17 or “Selecting Subobjects
Within an Object on the Wall Plot” on page 8-17.
2. Slightly move the cursor until it changes to .
3. Click and hold MB1 until the object or subobjects are in the desired
location. Subobjects within an object cannot be moved outside of
the object.
Deleting Objects or Subobjects

1. Select the objects or subobjects that you want to delete. For
instructions about selecting objects or subobjects within objects, see
“Selecting Objects on the Wall Plot” on page 8-17 or “Selecting
Subobjects Within an Object on the Wall Plot” on page 8-17.
2. Press Delete. Labels are not really deleted but are hidden. For more
information about hiding/showing labels, see “Using Wall Plot
Composer Right-click Menus” on page 8-21.
Resizing Objects or Subobjects
Resizing objects with a specific scale
You cannot resize an object for which you have specified a specific scale.
1. Select the objects or subobjects that you want to resize. For

instructions about selecting objects or subobjects within objects, see
2. Slightly move the cursor over a box located in the boundary of the
objects or subobjects until it changes to . If you want to resize
the text within an object while you resize the object, press Shift as
you resize the object.

Chapter 8: Plots
3. Click and hold MB1 until the objects or subobjects are the desired
size. Subobjects within an object cannot be resized outside of the
object. To rescale the fonts and line thickness and maintain size
relative to the object box, press and hold Shift while resizing
an object.
Placing Objects and Subobjects Relative to Each Other

1. Select the objects or subobjects that you want to move relative to
other overlapping objects or subobjects. For instructions about
selecting objects or subobjects within objects, see “Selecting
Objects on the Wall Plot” on page 8-17 or “Selecting Subobjects
Within an Object on the Wall Plot” on page 8-17.
2. Right-click and select Order. Bring to Front moves the object to

the front of all objects that overlap it. Bring Forward moves the
object forward one place when overlapped by other objects. Send
to Back moves the object to the back of all objects that overlap it.
Send Back moves the object back on place when overlapped by
other objects.
Aligning Objects and Subobjects on the Page

1. Select the objects or subobjects that you want to align on the page.
For instructions about selecting objects or items within objects, see
2. Use the Layout toolbar icons to align the object on the page.
Editing Style, Thickness, and Color

Double-click any line, and the Properties dialog box for the Wall Plot
Composer displays. Use this dialog box to edit the style, thickness,
and color.
Exporting Selected Objects

Export the currently selected objects to create a library of customized
objects. You can import this library into any plot. The exported objects
appear on the import pull-down menu.

Chapter 8: Plots
Designating an Object’s Properties as the Default Setting

1. Customize an object with your preferred line styles, color schemes,
and fonts.
2. Right-click and select Defaults > Save.
3. Select Defaults > Apply to apply the default properties to

existing objects.
Defaults for Different Paper Sizes
Different defaults are maintained for different ranges of paper sizes.
Setting an Exact Graph Size

Make a graph exactly the size you want by specifying both a scale and
a range on the Scale tab of the graphs properties. The graph will be
resized to adhere to the scale and range and will always spring back to
that size even if you try to resize it using the mouse.
Embedding Images on a Plot

Any images used on a plot get embedded in the .WPC file when the plot
is saved. This means the .WPC file can be used on different machines
without having to copy the images. The exceptions are logos, which are
refreshed based upon the current context. For more information, see
“Wall Plot Composer Files” on page 8-21.
Changing Object Properties

Many dialog boxes are used to change the properties of Wall Plot
Composer objects and subobjects. In this section, the tabs associated
with each type of object are listed along with a short description. For
more information about a specific tab, see the online help.

Chapter 8: Plots
To change the properties of an object or subobject:
1. Select the objects or subobjects for which you want to change the
properties. For instructions about selecting objects or subobjects
within objects, see “Selecting Objects on the Wall Plot” on page 8-
17 or “Selecting Subobjects Within an Object on the Wall Plot” on
page 8-17.
2. To access the Properties tabs, right-click and select Properties, or

click the toolbar icon.
Using Wall Plot Composer Right-click Menus

Right-click menus are a convenient way to access commonly used
functionality. The content of the right-click menus varies depending on
what the cursor is on when you right-click. Right-click menus are
available for:
• Wall Plot Composer – Use this right-click menu to select an object

for placement on the wall plot. You can also use Composer > Add
or the Objects toolbar to select objects for placement. Also
available on the Wall Plot Composer right-click menu is the Import
option that can be used to import a Wall Plot Export (.wpe) file.
You can also click the toolbar icon to import the WPE file.
• Wall Plot Composer Objects – Use this right-click menu to access

many useful configuration features for Wall Plot Composer objects
or subobjects. You can also right-click on the Wall Plot Composer
to select an object for inclusion on the wall plot.
• Wall Plot Composer Art Tools – Use this right-click menu to access
many useful configuration features for lines, polylines, polygons,
curved lines, or arrows.
Wall Plot Composer Files

Wall plots can be saved. If you create a Wall Plot file using one set of
wells and then reopen the file by using the same set of wells, all changes
you made to the plot are included. If you open the file with a different
set of wells, the layout and settings are remembered, but changes you
made to labels are not included.

Chapter 8: Plots
Plots can be saved as WPC (.wpc) files only. Stored in the plot file are:
• file version – To allow tracking changes over time and to maintain

backward compatibility with previous versions of the software.
• printer and page settings – The Wall Plot Composer attempts to

select this printer by default when printing or preview printing.
• colors and symbols – Any colors and symbols used by any offset
wells that are currently selected. When the WPC file is opened,
these settings are restored if the same offset wells are already
selected. After the WPC file is opened, selecting the offset wells
does not apply the color and symbols settings. The offset wells
must be selected prior to opening the WPC file.
• plot objects and subobjects – Including any property changes and

the positions of all labels.

Chapter 9
Tools
Overview
In addition to the setup windows for each level of the data structure, you
commonly use a number of additional utilities and resources when
working with the COMPASS™ software.

Chapter 9: Tools
Geodetic Calculator
The geodetic calculator is a simple tool used to calculate Grid

Convergence and Scale Factor for a given location, assuming a chosen
geodetic system. You can also use it to do quick geographic conversions
and calculate a Universal Transverse Mercator zone from geographic
coordinates. Calculated results are displayed in the window and can be
shared using Windows® Notepad.
The Calculator
The following graphic depicts the Geodetic Calculator:
Shows the full selection of
geodetic systems and datums
that are available. A Geodetic
Coordinate “System”
comprises the geodetic
system itself, a geodetic
datum or ellipsoid, and a
map zone.
Location may be entered as

local offsets from the site
center, map coordinates, or
geographic coordinates.
You must select the correct geodetic system before doing geodetic
conversions (latitude and longitude <> easting and northing). The
default system is taken from the current Field.
Some geodetic systems have a fixed datum (for example, Nigerian

Projection System uses Clarke 1880) while others (for example, UTM)
enable any datum to be selected. Additionally, some geodetic systems
have a fixed map zone (for example, Brunei/Borneo grid = NW Borneo
Grid), or enable a selection of one or more map zones (for example,
Lambert Algerie North and South).

Chapter 9: Tools
Select one of the input coordinate types by selecting its radio button, and
then enter the position of interest in the coordinate system based on the
following criteria:
Position Criteria Description
Local to Site Enter the location of interest as local Northings and

Eastings from site center.
Map Position Enter map coordinates based on the geodetic system.
Geographic Geodetic coordinates of your location based on the

spheroid.
Results
Grid Convergence
Grid convergence is the angle difference from True North to Grid North
for the location.
Scale Factor
The scale factor is the ratio between measured distance on the map and
measured distance on the ground at the location. Even though it is
calculated, Scale Factor is not used to conduct map-to-local coordinate
conversions unless the COMPASS geodetic system configuration file is
set up to apply it. Scale Factor conversion is normally turned off
by default.
UTM Zone
The geodetic calculator has a Pick UTM Zone button to compute the
correct Universal Transverse Mercator zone for the latitude and
longitude you enter. This button is only available when you choose the
Universal Transverse Mercator system.

Chapter 9: Tools
Geomagnetic Calculator
Where the local magnetic field cannot be measured or obtained, the

geomagnetic calculator enables the local geomagnetic field to be
calculated using a set of geographic coordinates, a date, and a predictive
global geomagnetic model. The calculator is most commonly used to
calculate magnetic declination, which is a required correction for
magnetic survey readings.
The calculated values are not used in any COMPASS calculations.

However, the results appear in most surveying reports and the Site data
block in Wall Plot Composer output. A North arrow is displayed in the
Status Box reference area, which can also be included in a wall plot.
The Calculator
The following graphic depicts the geomagnetic calculator:
Date defaults to the current
date, but it can be changed
to compute historical values.
Location defaults to the
current site. Change it by
retyping; using the up/
down arrows, or by
selecting Field, Site, Well
or User defined location.
You can compare the results from

different geomagnetic models;
however, beware of date
restrictions on certain models.
A Vertical Depth value can be

entered to calculate a geomagnetic
field lower down the wellpath.
A short Geomagnetism Report is available using the

Windows Notepad feature. This text can be easily
printed or copied to other documents using the Windows
Clipboard.

Chapter 9: Tools
The geomagnetic calculator can be launched from the Site Setup

window or from the COMPASS toolbar. The geographic coordinates
default to those of the current site, assuming that a site is open with a
geodetic system defined. The date defaults to the current date, but it can
be changed to any date. The geomagnetic model defaults to the one
selected in Site Setup.
The geomagnetic field can be calculated at the surface, or calculated at

different TVDs below the current site. This is a useful feature to gauge
the effect of TVD on declination of surveys taken down the wellpath.
High Definition Calculator

COMPASS™ calls the program supplied by NGDG/NOAA called
hdgm_file.exe. This program takes file input and output from the
HDGM model. This program is supplied externally and is controlled by
NGDC/NOAA and is not provided by Landmark®. The exe file must be
placed into a specific COMPASS™ directory for it to be recognised
(C:\Landmark\EDT_5000.1\COMPASS\Config\Geomagnetic
Models). You must move this file from into this directory. COMPASS
will recognize the models years of validity. The 2013 model is valid
from 2010 to 2014. Each HDGM licensed user will receive an update to
the model each year. Once the program is installed, you must select
HDGM from the program Magnetic Model menu (in Magnetic
calculator or Wellbore properties).

Chapter 9: Tools
The output below shows the magnetic calculator with the HDGM
values.
Results
The geomagnetic field varies slowly in time and can be described as that
of a bar magnet with north and south poles deep inside the Earth, and
magnetic field lines that extend well out in space. Because the field
varies, models are used to predict what the geomagnetic field is at a
particular time and place.
The results are in nanoteslas (nT) and degrees (°).
The geomagnetic field can be quantified as total field, dip angle,

horizontal intensity, vertical intensity, and declination. Total field or
total intensity is the magnetic strength, which ranges from about
23 microteslas (equivalent to 23000 nanoteslas or gammas, or
0.23 oersteds or gauss) around Sao Paulo, Brazil to 67 microteslas near
the south magnetic pole near Antarctica. The angle of the field relative
to the level ground is the dip angle or inclination, which is 90° at the
north magnetic pole. Note that dip angle is positive downwards.
Vertical and horizontal intensity are components of the total intensity.

X-North is the component of the magnetic field that is aligned 
north/south. Y-East is the component of the magnetic field that is

Chapter 9: Tools
aligned east/west. Z-Vertical is the component of the magnetic field that

is aligned with gravity.
Finally, the angle of the horizontal intensity, with respect to the north
geographic pole, is declination. Declination is the angle between where
a compass needle points and the true north pole.
The following graphic depicts the seven parameters of the Earth’s

magnetic field:
Results can be shared with other colleagues or contractors using the

Notepad feature.

Chapter 9: Tools
Using the Site Optimiser
When drilling to a number of targets, you can use the Site Optimiser to
determine the optimum site location to minimize the drilling required to
hit all targets that are defined for the site. The Optimiser plans a series
of 2D Slant or S-wells to each target aiming point. Results are displayed
with the total well drilled, maximum inclination held, maximum
measured depth, and total displacement. You can manually adjust the
site center, or use an optimize function that automatically determines the
site location.
Site Optimiser Plans Are Not Saved When the Tool Is Closed
The simple plans that Site Optimiser creates to determine the best location are not
saved when you close the tool. When you determine the best drilling location, click
the OK button to update the Site center, or click the Cancel button to exit without
updating the location.
Similar to other tools in the COMPASS software, the Site Optimiser

consists of two windows:
• Optimiser controls and views results.
• Viewer displays the relative positions of the site center and

target locations.

Chapter 9: Tools
Both dialog boxes come with specific tools.
Optimiser Viewer

Chapter 9: Tools
Site Optimiser
The following graphic depicts the Site Optimiser:
Target List displays the MD, TVD, and

maximum inclination to drill a well to
the target location.
Summary Statistics displays the worst

case directional parameters for all wells
to hit all targets.
Design Constraints enables you to

define directional drilling parameters for
Slant and Optimum Aligned wells to
hit targets.
Targets
When design constraints are entered, Target List contains a short
description of the plan to each target. The description includes the target
location, displacement from site center, maximum inclination of the
well, and its MD and TVD.
Design Constraints
This area is used to define which type of well design is used to drill to
each target.
You have two choices:
• Slant well
• Optimum Align using dogleg severity
The Kick-off field enables you to define a typical KOP. If you are using
optimum align, the optimiser uses the dogleg entered in the DLS1 field
for Slant wells. You can increase DLS1 and DLS2 using the Optimiser
if a plan to a particular target is not possible using the
parameters entered.

Chapter 9: Tools
The Optimiser assumes a well is used for each target in the site list; no
wells are planned that intersect multiple targets. All wells are drilled in
a vertical section—they are 2D.
Site Centre Location

This area enables you to manipulate the site center location. There are
three ways to change the site location:
• Type in the new site center location map coordinates.
• Click one of the buttons to move the site north, south,

east, or west by 100 map units.
• Click the Optimiser Viewer icon ( ), move the cursor, and then
click the required location.
When you decide on a location, click Set Site Centre to assign the
current coordinates to the current site.
Click Optimise to add the target Eastings and Northings and then divide
both by the number of targets to provide a first-guess start location.

Chapter 9: Tools
Optimiser Viewer
This graph is a plan view of the site targets and the site center connected
by lines that represent each plan. The Optimiser view appears
automatically when Site Optimiser is shown.
The Site Optimiser viewer enables you to toggle between UTM (Map)
and local coordinates display.
You can change the site center by entering the coordinates in the edit
controls, or by clicking the graph when it is displays Map coordinates.
Results
As you move the site location, the COMPASS software reports
the following:
Optimiser Viewer Results

This... Means...
Maximum Angle The maximum inclination of any wellpath.
Average Angle The sum of the final inclinations divided by the

number of targets.
Maximum MD The maximum measured depth to any of the targets.
Total Measured Depth The sum of the measured depth to all of the targets.

Chapter 9: Tools
Optimiser Viewer Results (Continued)

This... Means...
Maximum Displacement Horizontal displacement to the furthest target.
Total Displacement The sum of all the horizontal displacements to

all targets.
Centre Location The origin for the well plans.
Kick-off The depth at which each wellpath launches.
Build Rate The build rate for kick-off.
The maximum results also reports which target required this worst
case value.

Chapter 9: Tools

Chapter 10
Theory
Overview
This section of the training manual discusses in detail some of the theory
referenced in other sections of the manual. It also provides an
introduction to directional drilling.

Chapter 10: Theory
Introducing Directional Drilling
This section briefly introduces directional drilling and survey

measurement techniques. It also describes the hardware technology
related to use of the COMPASS™ software. This section is not intended
as a complete reference. Numerous, more thorough publications are
available that deal with this subject.
Directional drilling is the science of drilling a well so that its trajectory

follows the planned path to one or more drilling and/or geological
targets. The well must be drilled precisely by using the planned
directional parameters designed for the well. If the well steers off
course, the trajectory must be redesigned and drilled to get the well
back on track.
Different planning techniques enable wells of varying complexities to

be planned. Different tools enable the well to be drilled and surveyed so
the trajectory drilled is physically as close as possible to that of the plan.
Origins
Directional drilling has always been a part of drilling. In the early days
of drilling at Spindletop, Texas, resourceful drillers put wooden wedges
(whipstocks) down wells to deviate them towards nearby gushers. This
practice was known as poaching. To prevent this, laws were enacted that
required wells to be positioned within a lease boundary, and wells had
to be inspected for deviation by the Texas Railroad Commission and
other bodies.
The same methods of deviation and measurement enabled wells to be

deviated under obstacles, such as cities, lakes, seas, mountains, shallow
gas, and pipelines. Sidetracks are wellpaths intentionally deviated from
the original hole, which are used to get past fish (lost drill string), correct
unwanted deviation, or reuse an old hole to reduce costs.
Blowout relief wells started in the 1920s and required precision control
to drill the relief well to within a few feet of a blowout well. Early survey
instruments were developed to meet the requirement to know the exact
trajectory of both blowout and relief wells. When the relief well was
determined to be close to the blowout well, cement was pumped to plug
the formation and control the pressure. In modern relief wells, magnetic
ranging methods are used to accurately position the well close to
the blowout.

Chapter 10: Theory
Platform Drilling negates the requirement for additional platforms. A

single template underneath the platform is used to access a number of
locations within a reservoir. Deviated wellpaths permit tapping an
extended area of the reservoir from a compact drill site.
Salt Dome drilling is performed to access traps that form on the

upthrown side of the plug. Drilling can be problematic due to plastic salt
deforming casing and high pressure gas at shallow depths. Sidetracks
are made to reuse wells from depleted zones and to drill new ones.
Planned and unplanned deflections are called doglegs. Bit Walk is a

natural tendency for BHAs to steer off course due to formation and BHA
effects. Planned well trajectories can be corrected for this effect to keep
the well on target.
The following graphic depicts the origins of directional drilling:
Early Means of Directional Control
Oriented Drilling
Directional drilling began with the use of devices, such as whipstocks,
or techniques, such as jetting and rotary assemblies, to maintain course,
and wireline steering tools to orient and survey.

Chapter 10: Theory
Whipstock is the name of a wooden wedge that was the first widely used
deflection tool for changing the wellbore trajectory. It was run and
oriented on drill pipe, and the drill bit was deflected off it, provided the
whipstock was harder than the formation. Use of a whipstock was
problematic because a fill in the hole could seriously impede its
performance. Also, much experience was required to use this
method effectively.
The fulcrum and pendulum bottomhole assemblies are mechanical

methods of increasing or decreasing hole angle once an angle is built.
All BHAs cause a side force at the bit that makes the bit build, drop, or
hold angle and turn to the right or left. BHAs can be designed to provide
a desired performance. This technique relies on precise stabilizer
placement and blade diameters that are used to stand off and pivot the
collars and bit. This functionality, used with the natural turning
characteristic of different bit types, provides drillers with
three-dimensional, rotary, and directional control.
Keeping the well vertical is very difficult in areas of dipping or hard

formations. The weight applied to crush rock at the bit buckles the pipe
and causes deflection into the dip. Heavy collars and pendulums are
used to counteract these trends.
An example is “Oklahoma measured depths,” which was an early study

to determine the pipe depth required to reach top reservoir. Some wells
required 10-50% more pipe to reach the reservoir in so-called vertical
wells. This occurred because hard Okie formations required much
weight to be drilled. The large compressive forces caused buckling in
the drillpipe, which caused the drillstring to be deflected.
Jetting is used in soft formations (gumbo) where one nozzle in a tricone

bit is enlarged and oriented to create a rathole, into which the string is
dropped. The technique has been very successful in the Gulf of Mexico,
but it has not had much success in the North Sea. Jetting uses the
hydraulic energy of the drilling fluid to erode a hole along a given
azimuth. The string is dropped into the rathole.
This jet and drop procedure is performed for 3 to 6 ft without rotating to

establish the new direction. Rotary drilling then proceeds until a survey
is taken to verify the new wellbore trajectory.
This technique is dependent on the formation that is being drilled.

Weakly cemented sandstones and oolitic limestones prove good
candidates. Very soft or hard formations fail due to the jet blowing away
too much hole in soft formations and not having sufficient power to
make new hole in hard formations. The primary advantage of jetting is
that it can be performed with the same BHA that is used to drill.

Chapter 10: Theory
Survey Measurement
The wellpath trajectory is determined by measuring the inclination and
direction at various depths. Early measurement tools included the acid
bottle and punch card, which were used to record inclination to indicate
whether the trajectory had deviated. These tools were run on slick-line
(steel wireline). Hydrofluoric acid was poured into a glass bottle and
etched the bottle at the angle at which it came to rest. The punch card
technique was the basis for the TOTCO tool that is used for
inclination measurement.
Magnetic and gyroscopic tools are used to record inclination and

direction. They use either a single- or multi-shot timed camera or
sensitized paper to record stations for deviated wells. Gyros are usually
run on a conductor cable, which supplies power and can be used to
transmit readings to the surface. Other gyros are battery-powered and
are run on a wireline inside casing. Magnetic multi-shot tools are run on
a slick-line, sand line (braided cable), or dropped inside nonmagnetic
collars and brought back to the surface as the string is tripped.
The muleshoe ensures that the single-shot survey tool is consistently

located inside the bottom of the BHA relative to the bent sub, jetting bit,
whipstock wedge, undergauge stabilizer blade, or other tool used to
orient the BHA. As the survey tool lands in the BHA, a stub in the
muleshoe landing ring (in pipe) draws the recess in the survey tool spear
point round so that the tool seats in the direction of the tool face. For
quality control, a lead slug is seated in the recess to indicate a good
survey orientation. Marks in the slug indicate that the landing ring had
seated right into the muleshoe recess.
The following graphic depicts the early means of directional control:

Chapter 10: Theory
Modern Directional Drilling

During the 1970s, directional drilling requirements escalated on
platforms designed to access large parts of the reservoir. Drilling at
these sites became more complex as the fields matured and wells were
safely directed around existing producing and injecting wells. During
the 1980s and 1990s, directional drilling techniques and equipment
improved dramatically due to requirements to drill a large number of
horizontal wells though fractured limestone reservoirs to increase
production, instead of vertical wells. The Austin Chalk in Texas and the
Cretaceous chalks in the North Sea were driving areas of this 
cost-effective technique.
Extended Reach Drilling (ERD) wells are defined as those wells with
departures that exceed twice the well TVD. Different classes of ERD
wells have evolved based on increasing Reach/TVD ratios. These
classes include conventional directional drilling (<2.0),
ERD wells (>2.0), and severe ERD wells (>3.0).
Modern equipment and techniques can drill wells with 10 km stepouts

at only 1.5 km depth. The best example is Wytch Farm in southern
England where the Sherwood Sandstone reservoir underlies Poole Bay,
which is environmentally protected. Parts of the target are problematic
because the reservoir dips onshore, which requires the wells to hit the
target downdip, build, and drill up through the reservoir. These extended
wells have been used as a test site for some of the emerging technologies
described in this section. Even greater ERD wells are being drilled all
the time.
Horizontal wells were pioneered in fractured chalk reservoirs where

vertical wells are uneconomic, because they fail to hit vertical fractures.
Examples include Farmington (short radius), Austin Chalk (medium
radius), and offshore Denmark (long radius). Horizontal wells are now
used in reservoirs in which greater life and productivity can be expected
from fewer wells by limiting Water and Gas coning. The economic
success of these wells has resulted in horizontal wells becoming the
norm. The question now is: why drill a vertical well?

Chapter 10: Theory
Heavy Oil projects (Alberta, Canada) require steam injection from

horizontal wells to warm up the viscous oil and make it mobile so that it
flows into an adjacent parallel wellbore—this is an example of an
Enhanced Oil Recovery (EOR) method. One well is drilled for
production, and a second steam injection well is drilled 10/20 ft
underneath using magnetic ranging from the MWD to the magnetized
casing of the top well path. The hot steam from the injection well
reduces oil viscosity, which enhances oil flow into the
overlying producer.
Multi-lateral wellpaths are drilled from the same well. Laterals are
planned side-tracks where each path is selectively available to
completion equipment.
River crossing is where a hole is drilled under a river to carry a pipeline

or cable. The hole is drilled and widened using a mining rig on a truck
and deviated up to a target location. The pipeline is then attached to the
bit and pulled back through.
The following graphic depicts modern directional drilling techniques:

Chapter 10: Theory
Mud Motor
The mud motor is the workhorse of modern directional drilling, and
represents a major advancement in directional control. First employed
in the oil field by Dynadrill (Smith, Halliburton, now Pathfinder) in
1968 as a directional tool, Positive Displacement Motors (PDM) offer
greater torque and better pressure feedback than turbines. Drilling with
motors is easier because the surface standpipe pressure reflects motor
torque, which in turn can reflect weight on bit (WOB). As motor torque
increases, standpipe pressure increases and vice versa. Therefore, the
directional driller uses standpipe pressure to advance the bit by
controlling torque. If the bit stalls, you get an increase in pressure.
The motor is composed of four standard sections:
• The Dump Sub is used to divert mud so that the roughnecks do not
get wet feet. It is used to bypass the fluid from the motor while the
tool is tripped into and out of the hole. Essentially, it enables the
drillstring to fill with mud from the annulus while tripping in, and
enables the drillstring to drain while tripping out—this prevents it
from flowing out onto the drillfloor when a connection is made.
When the pumps are started, the fluid forces a piston down, which
closes the bypass ports and directs fluid through the motor.
• The Power Section converts hydraulic horsepower into mechanical

horsepower, which results in drill bit rotation. It consists of two
parts—the rotor and the stator—that, when assembled, form a
continuous seal along their contact points. The rotor is an alloy steel
bar shaped into a helix and is specially coated in chrome to reduce
friction, wear, and corrosion. The stator is a length of tubular steel
lined with an elastomer compound shaped into a helix to mate with
the rotor.
PDMs use a reverse application of the Moyno pump principle to

generate power from the mud stream. Slugs of mud are driven
through slots in the rotor/stator, generating torque, which causes the
rotor to cycle backwards through the grooves in the stator
(epicyclical motion). Different rotor/stator lobe ratios (1/2 5/6 9/10)
are used for more power and lower speed. The most common PDM
is a half-lob motor, in which the rotor has one lobe, and the stator has
two lobes. PDMs always have one more lobe in the stator than in the
rotor; this results in a progressive series of cavities for the fluid to
flow through. The pressure of this fluid causes the rotor to rotate.
Torque is then transmitted to the Universal Joint.

Chapter 10: Theory
• A Universal Joint forms the coupling assembly. This assembly

converts the epicyclical motion of the rotor into rotation at the drive
shaft, which is connected to the bit. It is either a U Joint (Car FWD)
or a solid piece of Beryllium Copper.
The Bent Housing was originated in 1982. Previously, a bent sub

was used above the motor. The bent housing allows the whole motor
to be rotated to drill straight, or to be oriented from the surface to
drill at an angle. Bent housing angles are now adjustable.
• The Bearing Assembly supports the motor drive shaft that transmits
drilling thrust to turn the bit. It consists of on- and off-bottom thrust
bearings and radial bearings. Of all the components in a mud motor,
the Bearing Assembly is the one most exposed to harsh conditions.
Controlled curved wellpaths are drilled using a sequence of
curved/oriented and straight/rotating sections. The bend is always
over-designed by 25-50%. The Stabilizer on the bearing housing is
used to balance the bit and the bend for optimum direction control.
MWD data tells the Directional Driller which way the bend is
pointing, and the inclination and azimuth of the well heading.
The following graphic depicts the mud motor:

Chapter 10: Theory
Measurement Systems
Accurate knowledge of wellbore position is important to:
• optimize the recovery from a reservoir by strategic positioning.
• build an accurate three-dimensional map of reservoir surfaces.
• enable the well to be relocated in the event of an

underground blowout.
• prevent loss of wells and damage caused by interwell collisions.
Modern wellbore surveying tools to achieve these objectives include

MWD and Gyros.
Magnetometers are the primary measurement method used while

drilling. The MWD and multishot tools have triaxial magnetometers and
accelerometers. Magnetic surveys are affected by variations in the
Earth’s magnetic field and by steel from the drill string; they require
special nonmagnetic drill collars to be spaced around the survey tool.
Gyroscope surveying is used to obtain more accurate logs. Gyros are

normally run inside the casing, although some gyros have been adapted
for pump down and MWD.
The rate gyroscope has become the standard in the business; it was
developed for cruise missiles. It uses one fixed axis gyro, with gimbal
axes that are held steady by electromagnetic resolvers. The current
required to prevent swing indicates the rate of turn of the assembly.
These gyros are sufficiently sensitive to pick up the Earth’s motion. This
is called gyrocompassing. The initial angle of the tool is detected, and
the sensors then detect movement as the tool moves down the wellbore
on wireline. The movements are integrated into angles and then
into positions.
Because gyros are generally more accurate than magnetic surveys, they
are typically used to correct the wellbore trajectory as calculated from
the magnetic survey data. When compared against the plan, magnetic
surveys can indicate that the well was not drilled to the plan, which can
result in some serious discussion between drillers and geologists. The
solution is to run a gyro and recalculate the wellbore trajectory to see
how it compares against the plan.

Chapter 10: Theory
The following graphic depicts magnetic and gyroscopic systems:
Measurement While Drilling

Measurement while drilling (MWD) tools are instruments that signal the
surface with information about the wellbore and formation at the drill
bit. The first application was directional information (inclination and
azimuth), which replaced the existing single-shot instruments.
In the early 1980s, formation information was available that included

short normal resistivity and natural gamma ray tools. Recent
developments include sensors that measure formation acoustic velocity
(sonic) and provide electrical images of dipping formations. These types
of tools are called Logging While Drilling (LWD), because the quality
of the data they provide results in equivalent wireline runs no longer
being required. Tools include sensors that measure Temperature,
Neutron Porosity, Density, Pressure, Vibration, and so on.
Additional information provided by MWD systems include downhole

weight on bit (WOB), downhole pressure at bit (PWD), drillstring
dynamics data (vibration), neutron porosity, bulk density, and ultrasonic
caliper measurements. This type of information is used to
aid geosteering.

Chapter 10: Theory
MWD tools typically consist of a power system, telemetry system,

directional sensor, and formation measurement tools.
• Power is supplied to the tool by turbine or batteries. Batteries can

supply tool power without drilling fluid circulation. Turbine energy
is abundant because it is supplied by fluid flow.
• The telemetry equipment transmits data back to the surface. The

signals are sent via mud pulses, which are interpreted by a pressure
transducer in the stand pipe at the surface.
An example is negative pulse, which is made by diverting mud from

the pipe to the annulus; it reduces the pressure in the stand pipe.
Pressure pulses are slow. A single pulse takes less than one second
to transmit. A digitized angle (toolface) can take 10-20 seconds to
transmit in digital form.
Positive pulse is also widely used, where the pulse is caused by a

valve restricting flow in the pipe. Both the negative and positive
mud pulse systems use a solenoid driven by a bank of capacitors to
drive the valve. Other methods for signalling the surface have been
tried, such as cable in the pipe (which wears out quickly) and radio
transmission (VLF is used but is limited by depth).
• Directional survey information is detected by triaxial

magnetometers (electronic compass) and triaxial accelerometers
(electronic plumb bob).
• Geophysical traces are transmitted for geosteering. These are the

Gamma Ray detector (a Geiger counter) and Resistivity (via
electromagnetic wave coils).
• At the surface, the pulses are converted into log data, which is made
available at the rig floor in terms of dial readings and to the
operator in the form of logs. Log plotting requires a depth tracking
system and computer software.

Chapter 10: Theory
The following graphic depicts the MWD at the rigsite:
The inability to steer mechanically while rotary drilling resulted in the

design and implementation of Variable Blade Stabilizers (VBS), which
are also known as Adjustable Gauge Stabilizers (AGS). These tools are
designed to enable blade diameters to be changed while drilling.
These tools, along with other fixed-gauge BHA stabilizers, are used to
change the build-and-drop tendency of rotary and steerable BHAs with
a simple pumps-on/pumps-off procedure. This ability enables the BHA
steering tendency to be changed to downhole without having to trip
the assembly.
Other benefits include improved hole cleaning, because of the

continuous rotation of the drill string, and reduced torque/drag tortuosity
by limiting dogleg severity.
Emerging Technologies
Several new technologies are being employed in directional drilling to
enable extended reach or designer well trajectories to be achieved.

Chapter 10: Theory
Coiled Tubing/Underbalanced Drilling

Coiled Tubing (CT) rigs were originally developed for workover
operations inside existing wells, but they have now been adapted for
sidetracking and drilling. CT rigs can drill short length wells (1500 ft
horizontal) at lower cost and time than a conventional drilling rig (with
a smaller footprint). The 2 in steel coiled tubing is coiled onto a drum
and fed into the wellbore through an injector with spools that can push
or pull the tubing into the hole. The standard steering combination of
bent mud-motor and MWD has been modified for CT with the addition
of a ratchet indexing device for orienting the motor bend. This
modification is used because CT cannot be rotated for orientation.
In the Underbalanced Drilling (UB) method, the drilling fluid is made

less dense than the formation fluid inside the reservoir. As a result, the
formation fluid flows into the wellbore. This is desirable because if the
drilling mud overbalances pore pressure, it invades the reservoir pore
space and reduces permeability. Reduced permeability results in
reduced formation productivity, particularly in horizontal wells where
the reservoir is subject to longer contact times with the drilling fluid, and
open hole completions are more prevalent.
In addition to reducing formation invasion, Underbalanced Drilling

results in reduction of drilling time because of increased ROP, increased
bit life, and less chance of differential sticking. In normal drilling, lower
mud densities are avoided because pressure problems (blowouts) will
occur which can be difficult to control.
In UB drilling, the pressure can be regulated with a special blowout

preventer and choke at surface. Fluid densities can be reduced by foam
drilling or injecting nitrogen into the drilling fluid. Special equipment is
used at the surface for solids separation and cuttings sampling.

Chapter 10: Theory
A major drawback with the technique has been the inability to use
MWD—and therefore geosteer—because of the presence of
compressible gas in the annulus that prevents mud pulse systems from
transmitting back to surface. Electromagnetic tools (EMT) have solved
this problem for shallow wells by enabling direct transmission back to
surface. In addition to formation restrictions, depth and temperature
restrictions have limited the use of EMT, although repeaters/transmitter
technology seems to enable EMT tools to be used at deeper depths.
The following graphic depicts the Coiled Tubing rig and

Underbalanced Drilling:
Multilaterals
Planned multilateral (ML) wellbores are now a part of modern
completion practices. Lateral wellbores allow simultaneous production
from two or more zones without the cost of the extra upper wellbore and
surface equipment. Second and subsequent wellbores can be drilled at
30% of the cost of the original well. This method only suits reservoirs
that have good mechanical stability.

Chapter 10: Theory
ML wells comprise a parent wellbore with one or more secondary

wellbores (laterals), all of which produce or inject fluids or provide
information. They are classified based on the junction mechanism
between the parent and sibling wellbores.
Whether the junction is open or closed, or whether the tubing or casing

is installed across the junction determines a ML well’s classification. A
common classification scheme contains six variants with
increasing complexity:
This classification... Has these features...
Level 1 No zonal isolation, such as openhole sidetracks.

Specific branch access is difficult, and
sometimes impossible.
Level 2 Cased and cemented parent wellbore with a milled

and slotted liner in the sibling, but it provides no zonal
isolation or pressure integrity across the junction.
Level 3 Contained cased and cemented parent and sibling

wellbores with cement or epoxy at the junction. The
junction provides no zonal isolation, and it cannot
sustain a differential pressure greater than the
formation fracture pressure.
Level 4 Same as Level 3, but it contains cement at the junction

designed to provide pressure support greater than the
fracture pressure. Packers in the parent wellbore
provide zonal isolation by being placed on both sides
of the sibling.
Level 5 Achieves full zonal isolation by using a downhole

deflector at the junction and a system of packers in
both parent and sibling wellbores. This enables
production tubing to be mechanically sealed.
Level 6 Uses mechanical splitters to achieve full zonal

isolation along both branches.
The lateral wellbore shown in the following graphic (Level 3) is

constructed by installing casing in the primary wellbore with a window
joint positioned and rotated in the desired direction. A protective sleeve
is removed and a drilling whipstock is oriented and installed. The
window is opened with a milled tooth bit run on a steerable motor.

Chapter 10: Theory
After the lateral is drilled, the junction is cased off with a short liner, and
the section of the primary wellbore is washed over and recovered.
Drilling of the lower lateral is then performed through the
primary wellbore.
Re-entry into the upper lateral can be performed at any time by installing
a retrievable workover whipstock.
The following graphic depicts the multilateral Level 3 completion:
ML wells can also be classed based on their relative geometry. Different

types include:
• opposed dual laterals

• stacked dual laterals
• multilaterals
• branched multilaterals
• splayed multilaterals
• forked dual laterals
Rotary Steerable Systems

Rotary steerable devices (also known as Steerable Rotary Drilling -
SRD) enable inclination and azimuth correction during rotary drilling.
The concept was first introduced in 1991 by Camco. There are currently
several rotary steerable systems in an expanding market. A number of
different types of systems are being tried.

Chapter 10: Theory
Rotary steerable systems offer considerable advantages over the

steerable mud motor system:
• Drillstring torque and drag should decrease, resulting in less

tortuous wellbores. This should reduce stuck pipe, and make
workovers and completions easier.
• Drilling in rotary mode should reduce bit walk.
• ROP should increase 50-100% by enabling bits to be selected for

performance reasons rather than for steerability.
• The number of trips required to directionally drill a well

should decrease.
• LWD data quality should improve due to drilling in rotary mode

and because the data is obtained closer to the bit. Drilling course
corrections can be made earlier.
• Cuttings transport is better in rotary mode, resulting in easier hole

cleaning, less chance of forming cuttings beds, and getting stuck.
• Fewer wiper runs are required (smoother wellbore, less cuttings

beds, and so on).
• Dogleg severity and wellbore spiralling should decrease, resulting

in easier completions.
• Steering should enhance production by keeping the well within

the reservoir.
In comparison, mud motor systems are slow when steering because the
drill string is not rotating and the string will pick up friction and cuttings.
The resultant extra drag becomes so great that the motor becomes
unsteerable, especially if the pipe buckles. A rotary steerable system
will drill faster and farther. They do not offer the range of radii of
motors; therefore, they are best suited to extended reach wells.

Chapter 10: Theory
A rotary steerable device consists of two sections:
• The bias unit is located immediately above the bit. It has three
actuator pads which can be operated in synchronization with bit
rotation to provide a lateral displacement in a constant direction and
hence steer the well. The pads are operated hydraulically by using
the drilling fluid, and they are controlled by a rotary valve that is
mechanically connected to the control unit.
• The control unit is mounted inside a nonmagnetic drill collar and

contains a directional sensor package, roll sensors, and
control electronics.
The example shown in the following graphic (a hybrid of three designs)

has a nonrotating stabilizer body with three buttons on hydraulic pistons
in each blade. Pressurized oil is driven through a rotating valve to one
blade’s pistons. This imparts thrust to the wall, which by reaction drives
the bit in the opposing direction and causes it to drill laterally by
side cutting.
The rotating valve determines the direction in which the thrust moves.
The valve itself is driven by an electric stepper motor to a position which
is synchronized with the rotation detected by a Hall effect transistor.
An oil pump is driven by the rotation movement.
The following graphic depicts the Hybrid Rotary Steerable Device:

Chapter 10: Theory
Geosteering
Geosteering is directional steering within the close confines of a
payzone. Wellpath adjustments are made based on real-time geological
and reservoir data, in addition to drilling observations. The goal is to
maintain a bit position at an optimum depth near the top of a
producing formation.
Geosteering enables the planned wellpath trajectory to be evaluated

against the geological model as the well is drilled. The planned build
trajectory may be compromised by inaccurate depths from seismic data
and cause the formation tops to come in higher or lower than expected.
Formation markers are detected by Gamma/Resistivity sensors while
drilling the well. The planned trajectory is adjusted to any changed
formation tops to ensure that the well meets its geological requirements.
Steering in the payzone is achieved by watching the petrophysical

sensors for signs of the producing formation and steering away from
poor formations. Shales and nonproductive formations have high
gamma counts (radioactivity) and low resistivity. Productive formations
are ideally clean of radioactive clay minerals, and therefore show low
gamma counts and high resistivity (especially in oil/gas zones).
Geosteering equipment consists of detectors near the bit, which provide

faster reaction times than sensors located 40 ft to 80 ft behind the bit.
This enables thinner zones to be drilled with confidence. In a thick
productive zone, other indicators may be used; such as examining
cuttings from the shale shakers, looking for microfossils in limestone, or
evaluating hydrocarbon returns at the surface. These measurements can
be more immediate if ROP is low through the reservoir.
The following graphic depicts geosteering equipment at the bit:

Chapter 10: Theory
To maintain quick reaction times, geosteering is a team effort requiring

close coordination between the driller, the directional driller, MWD
operator, and the geologist that is interpreting the formations.
With a typical ROP of 30 ft/hr, the engineers have two data points per
foot on which to interpret the well against the predicted geological/
petrophysical model. Log curves must be compared and interpreted
against predicted responses to ensure that the well is drilled to its
planned target. These interpretations are fed back to the directional
driller, and adjustments are made to the well trajectory where necessary.
The following graphic depicts the geosteering as a team effort at

the rigsite:

Chapter 10: Theory
Survey Calculation Methods
You use survey calculation methods to calculate the final wellbore

position of a second measurement station that is deeper than a first
station using the position and vector (inclination and azimuth) of the
first station, the vector of the second station, and the measured distance
between the two. Working down the wellpath, a survey calculation
method enables you to determine the total wellpath trajectory.
The COMPASS software offers four survey calculation methods.
• Minimum Curvature
• Radius of Curvature
• Average Angle
• Balanced Tangential
This setting is the company’s preferred calculation method and cannot

be overridden in the Survey module except for Inclination-only surveys.
The following graphic depicts wellpath trajectory

calculation parameters:
Compass Survey Calculation Plan View (horizontal)

North A2
3 Dimensional View
A1
DNS
RI (radcur)
Great Circle East

DEW
East
Vertical Section View
R (mincur)
RA (radcur)
DL
I1
DMD DVD I2
TVD TVD
Tangents to Sphere V.Section
DVS

Chapter 10: Theory
General Parameters
• TVD2 = TVD1 + TVD
• NS2 = NS1 + NS
• EW2 = EW1 + EW
Input Parameters
• MD1 = measured depth of top point (ft/m)
• MD2 = measured depth of bottom point (ft/m)
• I1 = inclination of top point (rad)
• I2 = inclination of bottom point (rad)
• A1 = azimuth of top point (rad)
• A2 = azimuth of bottom point (rad)
Output Values
• NS = change in north/south position between points 1-2 (ft/m)
• EW = change in east/west position between points 1-2 (ft/m)
• TVD = change in true vertical depth between points 1-2 (ft/m)
• DL = Dogleg Angle (rad)
• DLS = Rate of change of angle with depth in 3D space
• Build = Rate of change of inclination with depth (may be Drop)
• Walk = Rate of change of azimuth with depth (also called Turn)
• MD = MD2 - MD1
• DL = ArcCos (Cos(I2 - I1) - Sin(I1) * Sin(I2) * (1.0 - Cos(A2 - A1)))
• DLS = DL/MD
• Build = (I2-I1) / MD
• Walk = (A2-A1) / MD
Note
Azimuth is normalized for > 180 degree turns.

Chapter 10: Theory
Calculation Methods
Minimum Curvature (or Circular Arc)

This survey calculation method is most widely adopted in the oil
industry. The path taken conforms to the tangential arc in the 3D sphere
shown in the preceding diagram.
Calculate RF (Minimum Curvature Ratio Factor) Smoothing Factor

• If (DL < 0.0043633 rad), RF = 1.0
• If (DL >= 0.0043633 rad), RF = (2.0 / DL) * Tan(DL/2.0)
Note
(0.0043633 rad = 0.25 deg.)
• NS = MD/2.0 * (Sin(I2)*Cos(A2) + Sin(I1)*Cos(A1)) * RF

• EW = MD/2.0 * (Sin(I2)*Sin(A2) + Sin(I1)*Sin(A1)) * RF
• TVD = MD/2.0 * (Cos(I2) + Cos(I1)) * RF
Radius of Curvature
The Radius of Curvature survey calculation produces slightly different
results from the Minimum Curvature method. The path taken conforms
to the two separate radii in the plan and section views shown in the
COMPASS Survey Calculation diagram. It does not have a single 3D
radius, and hence dogleg severity (DLS) changes over the course length.
• NS = MD * [Cos(I1) - Cos(I2)] / (I2 - I1) * [Sin(A2) -

Sin(A1)] / (A2 - A1)
• EW = MD * [Cos(I1) - Cos(I2)] / (I2 - I1) * [Cos(A1) -
Cos(A2)] / (A2 - A1)
• TVD = MD * [Sin(I2) - Sin(I1)] / (I2 - I1)
Average Angle
Average angle is a survey calculation easily adopted to hand calculation.
The differences between it and the preceding two methods are very
small.
• NS = MD * Sin((I1+ I2)/2)*Cos((A1+ A2)/2)

Chapter 10: Theory
• EW = MD * Sin((I1+ I2)/2)*Sin((A1+ A2)/2)

• TVD = MD * Cos((I1+ I2)/2)*Cos((A1+ A2)/2)
Balanced Tangential
The balanced tangential survey calculation method is essentially the
Minimum Curvature method with RF=1. It is considered to be the least
accurate of these four methods:
• NS = MD/2.0 * (Sin(I2)*Cos(A2) + Sin(I1)*Cos(A1))

• EW = MD/2.0 * (Sin(I2)*Sin(A2) + Sin(I1)*Sin(A1))
• TVD = MD/2.0 * (Cos(I2) + Cos(I1))
Inclination-only
The inclination-only method is included in the COMPASS software to
handle inclination-only measurement tools like TOTCO. It calculates
vertical depth in the same way as Radius of Curvature or Minimum
Curvature, but it does not calculate the north and east dimensions.

Chapter 10: Theory
Geodesy
Geodesy is the science of measuring the Earth’s surface. The Earth is

round (sort of) and maps are flat. A geodetic system enables you to
convert geodetic coordinates (angles on a round earth—latitude/
longitude) to map coordinates (distances on a flat map—eastings/
northings). To do this, you must know the system, the datum (ellipsoid),
and the zone.
System
A geodetic system is one or more map projections covering adjacent
parts of the globe. A system can comprise one or more zones. If you do
not know the geodetic system for your area, or if you have no need to
convert between geodetic and map coordinates, select Flat Earth. By
selecting Flat Earth, you disable conversion between geodetic and map
coordinates throughout the field. Otherwise, select the geodetic system
agreed on for use in an area.
The COMPASS software ships with a predefined set of geodetic

systems that cover the majority of systems used in the oilfield. Certain
locations require additional or customized geodetic systems. Add these
systems in the COMPASS software as geodetic configuration files,
which are commonly constructed by your regional Landmark®
Support Office.
Datum
A datum or ellipsoid is essentially a mathematical model that best
represents the actual shape of the Earth’s surface in a given area. The
Earth’s surface is generally geometric, like an American football or
rugby ball. However, it is an irregular, slightly flattened sphere—a
geoid. You cannot compute geodetic conversion on a geoid, so you must
assume the Earth to be an ellipsoid. Because the Earth’s surface is
irregular, differently shaped ellipsoids better represent different parts of
the globe. The size and shape of the ellipsoid varies depending on which
part of the globe is mapped.
Regional geographic organizations, and even oil operator survey

departments, recommend which geodetic system and ellipsoid to use for
a given operating area.

Chapter 10: Theory
Map Zone
A geodetic system can contain one or more map zones. Each zone maps
a different area. Following are three examples of geodetic systems that
are shipped with the COMPASS software:
US Stateplane Coordinate System 1983

This system maps the United States. It is a combination of Transverse
Mercator and Lambert Projections and comprises 124 zones. Most states
have more than one zone—Alaska has ten zones, Texas has five, and
Maryland has only one. Unlike the UTM projection, only one ellipsoid
is used for the entire system—GRS 1980.
Universal Transverse Mercator

The Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) system maps the entire
world by dividing it into 60 zones, with each 6° of longitude wide and
extending up to 84° N and S. When the UTM system is selected, the
COMPASS software makes all datums available and lets you select any
one of the 60 zones north or south.
The following diagram depicts a UTM zone covering the Southern and
Northern hemispheres. Two reference points are plotted: one in the west
side of the Northern hemisphere, the other in the east side of the
Southern hemisphere. Note that convergence (angle from True North to
Grid North) for both points is negative. In the other two quadrants, (NE
and SW), convergence is positive.

Chapter 10: Theory

Chapter 10: Theory
UK National Grid
This system maps the United Kingdom, has one zone, and is based
on the Airy 1949 ellipsoid.

Chapter 10: Theory
Geomagnetism
What is the Magnetic North Pole? The Earth’s core has remained molten
due to heat from ongoing radioactive decay. Convection currents
flowing in the outer core generate a magnetic field, but the poles of this
field do not coincide with the North and South Poles (the axis of rotation
of the Earth). In early 1998, the average position of the modeled north
magnetic dipole (according to the IGRF-95 geomagnetic model) was
79.5° N and 106.3° W, which is 40 kilometers northwest of Ellef
Ringnes Island in the Canadian Arctic. This position is 1,170 kilometers
from the true (geographic) North Pole.
It is generally believed that a compass needle points to the Magnetic

North Pole. Because the geomagnetic field is the effect of complex
convection currents in magma composing the Earth’s core, the local
field must be described as several dipoles, each with a different intensity
and orientation. Because of this, the compass needle actually points to
the sum of the effects of these dipoles at a given location. In other words,
the needle aligns itself with the magnetic lines of force. Other factors, of
local and solar origin, further complicate the resulting field. It may be
alright to say that a compass needle points to magnetic north, but it only
roughly points to the north magnetic dipole.

Chapter 10: Theory
The following graphic depicts the Magnetic Declination variation as

calculated by IGRF95. Mercator projection. IAGA Division V,
Working Group 8, International Geomagnetic Field, 1995 Revision,
J. Geomag, Geoelectr., 47, 1257-1261, 1995:
Geomagnetic Main Field Models

A geomagnetic main field model is a set of a few hundred numbers
determined by 3D curve fitting a large number of geomagnetic field
observations from sites around the world. Predictive geomagnetic
models can be used worldwide and only predict the values of that
portion of the field originating in the deep outer core.
Different geomagnetic models are available, some of which are used

within the COMPASS software:
• World Magnetic Model (WMM) – This model is updated every

five years. This public model is available from the US Department
of Defense, who provides it on behalf of the US National
Geophysical Data Center. It is available from the Internet at 
http://ftp.ngdc.noaa.gov/seg/potfld/DoDWMM.shtml.

Chapter 10: Theory
• International Geomagnetic Reference Field (IGRF) – This

public model is updated every five years. It is available from the
International Association of Geomagnetism and Aeronomy on their
Internet site at http://ftp.ngdc.noaa.gov/IAGA/wg8/igrf2000.html.
• Definitive Geomagnetic Reference Field (DGRF) – This model

describes how the field actually behaved. This model is also
provided for five-year intervals and is available from the
International Association of Geomagnetism and Aeronomy
web site.
• British Geological Survey Geomagnetic Model (BGGM) – The

BGS annually computes a model of the geomagnetic field to meet
the demands of accuracy and Quality Assurance required for
directional drilling and well placement. The BGGM is supported by
major oil companies, service companies in the oil sector, and by the
Health and Safety Executive.The model is updated every year, and
is therefore considered more accurate. It is a commercial model,
and is therefore not shipped automatically with the COMPASS
software. Clients must provide proof of a license from the BGS
before Landmark will ship geomagnetic model files for use with
BGGM. Information is available from the BGS on the Internet at
http://192.171.143.111/bggm.html.
Factors that Influence Declination

The following factors influence declination and, therefore, magnetic
survey instruments. Their effects are noted in parentheses:
• location (one to thousands of kilometers/degree)

• local magnetic anomalies (0-90 degrees; 3-4 degrees frequently)
• altitude (negligible to 2 degrees)
• secular change (2-25 years/degree)
• diurnal change (negligible to 9 degrees)
• solar magnetic activity (negligible to extreme)
Location has an obvious effect, as magnetic declination varies over the

entire globe. Each position on the Earth has a particular declination. The
change in its value as you travel is a complex function. If you travel
along a straight line of equal declination, called an isogonic line, it
varies little over thousands of kilometers. However, if you cross
isogonic lines at high latitudes or near magnetic anomalies, the
declination can change more than one degree per kilometer.

Chapter 10: Theory
Local anomalies originating in the upper mantle, crust, or surface distort

the WMM or IGRF predictions.
Geologic features include the following:
• ferromagnetic ore deposits
• volcanic structures, such as dikes and lava beds
• topographical features such as ridges, trenches, seamounts,

and mountains
• ground that was hit by lightning and possibly harboring fulgurites
Cultural features include the following:
• power lines, pipes, rails, and buildings
• personal items, such as a steel watch or belt buckle, which can

cause an error of three to four degrees
In some places, the field is completely vertical, and a compass attempts

to point straight up or down (for example, at the magnetic dipoles), but
other locations have extreme anomalies that create the same effect.
Around such a place, the needle on a standard compass drags so badly
on the top or the bottom of the capsule that it cannot be steadied.
The effect of altitude is normally negligible. According to the IGRF, a

20,000 meter climb, even at a magnetically precarious location as
Resolute, NWT, Canada (500 kilometers from the north magnetic pole),
results in a two-degree reduction in declination.
Secular change is the movement of the magnetic North Pole itself. As

convection currents churn in apparent chaos in the Earth’s core, all
magnetic values change erratically over the years. The north magnetic
pole has wandered over 1,000 kilometers since Sir John Ross first
reached it in 1831. Its rate of displacement has been accelerating in
recent years and is currently moving about 24 kilometers per year. That
is several times faster than the average of six kilometers per year
since 1831.

Chapter 10: Theory
The stream of ionized particles and electrons emanating from the Sun,
known as solar wind, distorts the Earth’s magnetic field. As the Earth
rotates, any location is subject alternately to the lee side and then the
windward side of this stream of charged particles. This causes the
magnetic poles to move around an ellipse several tens of kilometers in
diameter, even during periods of steady solar wind without gusts.
The resulting diurnal change in declination is negligible at tropical and

temperate latitudes. For example, Ottawa is subject to plus or minus
0.1 degree of distortion. However, in Resolute, NWT, Canada, the
diurnal change cycles through at least plus or minus nine degrees of
declination error. This error can conceivably be corrected, but both the
time of day and the date have to be considered, as this effect also varies
with seasons.
The solar wind varies throughout an 11-year sunspot cycle, which itself
varies from one cycle to the next. In periods of high solar magnetic
activity, bursts of X-rays and charged particles are projected chaotically
into space, which creates gusts of solar wind. These magnetic storms
interfere with radio and electric services, and produce dazzling auroras.
The varied colors are caused by oxygen and nitrogen being ionised, and
then recapturing electrons at altitudes ranging from 100 to
1,000 kilometers. The term geomagnetic storm refers to the effect of a
solar magnetic storm on the Earth.
For wellbore magnetic survey instruments, other conditions that can

affect the measurement of wellbore azimuth are:
• nearby casing, for example at KOPs

• drillstring magnetization
• nearby offset, P&A’d or junked wells

Chapter 10: Theory
True, Grid, and Magnetic North
True North
Imagine a line from you to the North Pole. This is a line of constant
longitude and points to True North. In many cases, True North is chosen
because directional survey instruments read azimuth to true (or
magnetic) north. In both cases, the convergence correction does not
need to be applied. True North is an accepted reference for
local coordinates.
Grid North
On a map, a line joining two points with equal easting coordinates points
to Grid North. By representing the spherical earth on a flat map, the
distortion introduced means that (over most of the map) Grid North does
not point to True North. The difference between Grid North and True
North is called the grid convergence. Grid North is an accepted
reference for local coordinates.
Magnetic North
Additionally, Magnetic North is a north reference, but it is not used in
the COMPASS software. A magnetic compass points to the horizontal
component of the Earth’s magnetic field and is measured from True
North. Magnetic North varies with location and time. Magnetic North is
not an accepted convention for local coordinates. When loading
azimuths and local coordinates into the COMPASS software, they
should already be corrected to True or Grid North depending on the
convention chosen in the project properties.

Chapter 10: Theory
The following graphic depicts the Norths’ references customary in

Northern and Southern hemispheres:
Diagrams are Schematic
These diagrams are schematic. The direction and magnitude of magnetic

declination and grid convergence depends upon the location.
In the COMPASS software, the convention for displaying convergence

in the Northern hemisphere is that positive values are to the east (right)
of True North, and negative values are to the west (left) of True North.
South of the equator, this convention is reversed.

Chapter 10: Theory
The following diagram depicts conventions for the sign of grid

convergence in the Northern and Southern hemispheres, and west/east
of the geodetic zone’s central meridian.
Com pass - Sign of Grid Convergence
Central
M eridian
G rid = True - Conv G rid = True - Conv
G T T G
- +
Equator
T G G T
+ -
G rid = True - Conv G rid = True - Conv
500,000 m

Chapter 10: Theory
Driller’s Target Algorithm
The following explanation describes the statistical algorithms employed

to construct a Driller’s Target from a Geological Target using the
positional uncertainty surface calculated for the wellpath down to the
TVD of the target.
Surveys show that a wellpath has penetrated a target at a position.
Uncertainty at this position is represented by an error ellipse (the one

shown below is drawn at two standard deviations).
Points are 100 possible repeat survey locations of the actual point of
penetration in the target. The eight points lying outside the target
represent the 8% probability that the target has been missed. From this
information, the inclusion probability of hitting the Geological Target at
the calculated point is 92%.
Geological
Target

Chapter 10: Theory
One can calculate the inclusion probability at every point within the
geological target and color code it as follows:
< 90%
90-95%
> 95%
Drillers target
defined from 90%
confidence contour.
Well
Direction
The following graphic depicts the Plan view and 3D view (inset)
displaying a reduced size Driller’s Target constructed from a circular
Geologic Target by using the displayed Error Ellipse dimensions down
an example wellpath. The Driller’s Target was constructed using a
75% confidence level:
Geological Target
Drillers Target

Chapter 10: Theory
Select the confidence for hitting the target. The confidence is the
percentage probability that if the wellpath, when surveyed, intercepts
the target at this point, that it really is within the boundaries of the target.
A useful range is from 80% to 95%. Neither 0% nor 100% is possible.
The drilling target boundary represents a contour of confidence—points
within the boundary represent better than the required confidence.
Because the Driller’s Target tool uses the errors on the current definitive
path at the depth of the target, if the path does not go to this depth or no
errors exist, an error message appears. Additionally, to construct a
driller’s target, the tool needs a geological target that is big enough to fit
the errors; otherwise, an error message appears saying the target is not
big enough. In this situation, you have two options: use a bigger
geological target or assume a more accurate (and possibly more
expensive) survey program to make the errors smaller. The driller’s
target is given the name of the original target, with the confidence label
displayed.
Driller’s Targets in Live Views
In the live views, it is possible to only display Driller’s Targets and hide Geological
Targets. For this setting, see the Options tab in Graph Setup.

Chapter 11
References
Brooks, A.G. and Wilson, H., An Improved Method for Computing
Wellbore Position Uncertainty and its Application to Collision and
EUROPEC, Milan, 22–24 Oct. 1996.
DuBrule, O. and Nelson, P.H., Evaluation of Directional Survey

Errors at Prudhoe Bay. SPE 15462, 1986 ACTE, New Orleans,
Oct. 5–8.
Harvey, R.P., Walstrom, J.E. and Eddy, H.D., A Mathematical

Analysis of Errors in Directional Survey Calculations, SPE 3718,
JPT, pp. 1368–1374, Nov. 1971.
McClendon, R.T. and Anders, E.O., Directional Drilling Using the

Catenary Method, SPE/IADC 13478, 1985 SPE/IADC Drilling
Conference, New Orleans, Mar 6–8.
Thorogood, J.L., Instrument Performance Models and their

Application to Directional Survey Operations, SPE 18051, 1988
ATCE, Houston, Oct. 2–5.
Thorogood, J.L. and Sawaryn, S.J. The Travelling Cylinder

Diagram: A Practical Tool for Collision Avoidance, SPE 19989,
SPEDE pp. 31–36, Mar 1991.
Walstrom, J.E., Brown, A.A. and Harvey, R.P., An Analysis of

Uncertainty in Directional Surveying, JPT, pp. 515–523, April
1969.
Walstrom, J.E., Harvey R.P. and Eddy, H.D., A Comparison of

Various Directional Survey Models and an Approach to Model
Error Analysis, SPE 3379, SPE 46th Annual Meeting, New
Orleans, Oct. 3–6, 1971.
Williamson, H.S., Accuracy Prediction for Directional MWD, SPE

56702, 1999 ACTE, Houston, Oct. 3–6.
Wolff, C.J.M. and deWardt, J.P., Borehole Positional Uncertainty -

Analysis of Measuring Methods and Derivation of Systematic
Error Model, JPT pp. 2339–2350, Dec. 1981.

Chapter 11: References

Compass 5000.1.12 157605H

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Compass 5000.1.12 157605H

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Compass 5000.1.12 157605H

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COMPASS™ Software

Part Number 157605 Revision H March 2014

Halliburton | Landmark Software & Services

Chapter 2: The Engineer’s Data Model 

Logging In to the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Describing the Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual i

Rules for Associating Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Common Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Data Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Concurrent Use of Same Data By Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Importing and Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Using Datums in EDM™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

ii COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Ground Elevation (Land Well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Chapter 3: Using the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introducing the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual iii

iv COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Rename (Project Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual v

Copy (Well Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

vi COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Import (Design Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Chapter 4: Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Accessing Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Using the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Using the Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Using Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Using Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Accessing the Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Configuring Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Chapter 5: Planning Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Defining Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual vii

Target Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Creating a Plan Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Using the Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Planning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

viii COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Optimum Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Using the Plan Optimiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Planning and Anticollision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Planning Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual ix

Chapter 6: AntiCollision Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Specifying Anticollision Analysis Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Selecting Offset Designs for Anticollision Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Analyzing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

x COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual

Traveling Cylinder View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Chapter 7: Survey Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Defining New Survey Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Managing Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

COMPASS™ Software Release 5000.1.12 Training Manual xi

Input Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Analyzing Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Survey Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36